Contents

Mercedes-Benz A-Class 2021 Operator's Manual PDF

1 of 426
1 of 426

Summary of Content for Mercedes-Benz A-Class 2021 Operator's Manual PDF

Digital in the vehicle Vehicle document wallet Digital on the Internet Digital as an app Familiarize yourself with the con tents of the Operator's Manual directly via the vehicle's multi media system (menu item "Vehi cle information"). Start with the quick guide or broaden your knowledge with practical tips.

Here you can find comprehen sive information about operating your vehicle and about services and guarantees in printed form.

You can find the Operator's Man ual on the Mercedes-Benz home page.

The Mercedes-Benz Guides app is available free-of-charge in familiar app stores.

17758433109 1775843310

Apple iOS AndroidTM

Order no. P177 0651 13 Part no. 177 584 33 10 Edition B 2021

A-Class Operator's Manual

Mercedes-BenzMe rce

de s-B

en z

A-C las

s

Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi cles and about MercedesBenz AG can be found on the following websites: https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) https://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Documentation team MercedesBenz AG: Not to be reprinted, trans lated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from MercedesBenz AG.

Vehicle manufacturer MercedesBenz AG Mercedesstrae 120 70372 Stuttgart Germany

Front passenger airbag warning

Airbag warning sticker for USA and Canada

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co-driver airbag is enabled

If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the co- driver airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle".

As at 09.04.20

Thank you for purchasing a Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer operating lifespan of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Opera tor's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people. Damage to the vehicle resulting from the disre gard of the instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol lowing factors: R Model R Order R National version R Availability

Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: R Design R Equipment

R Technical features

The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus trations. The following documents are integral parts of the vehicle: R Digital Operator's Manual R Printed Operator's Manual R Maintenance Booklet R Equipment-dependent Supplements

Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of the documents on to the new owner. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company

1775843310

1775843310

Symbols ........................................................ 5

At a glance .................................................... 6 Cockpit ........................................................... 6 Indicator and warning lamps (standard) ........ 10 Indicator and warning lamps (Wide screen Cockpit) ............................................ 12 Overhead control panel ................................ 14 Door operating unit and seat adjustment ..... 16 Emergencies and breakdowns ...................... 18

Digital Operator's Manual ......................... 20 Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ...... 20

General notes ............................................. 22 Protecting the environment .......................... 22 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ...................... 22 Operator's Manual ........................................ 23 Service and vehicle operation ....................... 24 Operating safety ........................................... 25 Declaration of conformity for wireless vehicle components ..................................... 26 Diagnostics connection ................................ 27

Qualified specialist workshop ....................... 28 Correct use of the vehicle ............................ 28 Notes for persons with electronic medi cal aids ......................................................... 28 Problems with your vehicle ........................... 29 Reporting safety defects ............................... 29 Limited Warranty .......................................... 30 QR code for rescue card ............................... 30 Data storage ................................................. 30 Copyright ...................................................... 35

Occupant safety ......................................... 36 Restraint system ........................................... 36 Seat belts ..................................................... 38 Airbags ......................................................... 42 PRE-SAFE system ....................................... 50 Automatic measures after an accident ......... 51 Safely transporting children in the vehi cle ................................................................. 51 Notes on pets in the vehicle ......................... 65

Opening and closing .................................. 66 SmartKey ...................................................... 66 Doors ............................................................ 70

Trunk ............................................................ 73 Side windows ............................................... 77 Sliding sunroof ............................................. 80 Anti-theft protection ..................................... 84

Seats and stowing ...................................... 87 Notes on the correct driver's seat posi tion ............................................................... 87 Seats ............................................................ 88 Steering wheel .............................................. 95 Easy entry and exit feature ........................... 96 Memory function .......................................... 97 Stowage areas .............................................. 98 Sockets ....................................................... 105 Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna .. 105 Installing/removing the floor mats ............. 107

Light and visibility ................................... 109 Exterior lighting .......................................... 109 Interior lighting ............................................ 114 Windshield wiper and windshield washer system ........................................................ 115 Mirrors ........................................................ 117

2 Contents

Climate control ......................................... 121 Overview of climate control systems .......... 121 Operating the climate control system ......... 121

Driving and parking ................................. 125 Driving ........................................................ 125 DYNAMIC SELECT switch ............................ 134 Automatic transmission .............................. 137 Function of the 4MATIC ............................... 141 Refueling .................................................... 142 Parking ....................................................... 144 Driving and driving safety systems .............. 151 Vehicle towing instructions ......................... 200

Instrument Display and on-board computer .................................................. 201 Notes on the Instrument Display and on- board computer .......................................... 201 Instrument display overview ....................... 202 Overview of the buttons on the steering wheel .......................................................... 203 Operating the on-board computer .............. 203 Overview of what is shown on the multi function display .......................................... 205

Head-up Display ......................................... 205

MBUX multimedia system ...................... 208 Overview and operation .............................. 208 System settings .......................................... 217 Navigation ................................................... 221 Telephone ................................................... 226 Mercedes me and apps .............................. 230 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ...... 238 Radio & media ............................................ 242 Sound settings ............................................ 249

Maintenance and care ............................. 250 ASSYST PLUS service interval display ........ 250 Engine compartment .................................. 251 Checking the brakepad thickness ............... 257 Cleaning and care ....................................... 257

Breakdown assistance ............................ 265 Emergency .................................................. 265 Flat tire ....................................................... 266 Battery (vehicle) .......................................... 273 Tow starting or towing away ....................... 278

Electrical fuses ........................................... 283

Wheels and tires ...................................... 287 Notes on noise or unusual handling char acteristics ................................................... 287 Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires ............................................................ 287 Notes on snow chains ................................ 288 Tire pressure .............................................. 288 Loading the vehicle .................................... 295 Tire labeling ................................................ 299 Definition of terms for tires and loading ..... 304 Changing a wheel ....................................... 307 Emergency spare wheel .............................. 317

Technical data .......................................... 320 Notes on technical data .............................. 320 Vehicle electronics ..................................... 320 Radio operating permits for vehicle com ponents ...................................................... 322 Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview ............................ 322 Operating fluids .......................................... 323 Vehicle data ................................................ 330

Contents 3

Display messages and warning/indi cator lamps .............................................. 332 Display messages ....................................... 332 Warning and indicator lamps ...................... 379

Index ......................................................... 394

4 Contents

In this Operator's Manual, you will find the fol lowing symbols:

& DANGER Danger due to not observing the warning notices

Warning notices draw your attention to haz ards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. # Observe the warning notices.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe envi ronmental notes

Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behavior or envi ronmentally responsible disposal. # Observe environmental notes.

* NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage

Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged.

# Observe notes on material damage.

% These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you.

# Instruction (/ page) Further information on a topic Display Information on the multifunction dis

play/media display 4 Highest menu level, which is to be

selected in the multimedia system 5 Relevant submenus, which are to be

selected in the multimedia system * Indicates a cause

Symbols 5

Left-hand-drive vehicles

6 At a glance Cockpit

1 Steering wheel gearshift paddles 140

2 Combination switch 110

3 Instrument display 202

4 DIRECT SELECT lever 137

5 Start/stop button 126

ECO start/stop function 133

6 Media display 208

7 Climate control systems 121

8 Hazard warning light system 111

9 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps 47

A Glove box 100

B Storage compartment 100

C Cup holder

D 8 Controller for volume and switching sound on/off

208

Switches the MBUX multimedia system on/off

208

Ez Calls up navigation 210

F| Calls up radio or media 210

G % Calls up the telephone 210

H Calls up favorites 210

Iy Calls up vehicle functions 210

Jc Active Parking Assist 196

K DYNAMIC SELECT switch 135

L Touchpad 210

M Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys tem

203

N Adjusts the steering wheel 95

O Switches the steering wheel heater on/off

95

P Control panel:

On-board computer 203

Cruise control 161

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 164

At a glance Cockpit 7

Q Diagnostics connection 27

R Opens the hood 251

S ! Electric parking brake 148

T Light switch 109

8 At a glance Cockpit

Instrument Display (standard)

10 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (standard)

1 ! ABS 390

2 #! Turn signal lights 110

3 h Tire pressure monitoring system 392

4 # Electrical malfunction 382

5L Distance warning 389

6 Recuperative Brake System, USA only 386

J Brakes (yellow), Canada only 386

7 Brakes (red) 386

$ USA only

J Canada only

8 ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 386

9 Electric parking brake (red) 386

F USA only

! Canada only

A ; Check Engine 382

B R Rear fog lamp 110

C K High beam 110

L Low beam 109

T Parking lamps 109

D ESP OFF 390

ESP 390

E 6 Restraint system 380

F Fuel level 202

G Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator

382

H Power steering 381

I Seat belt 380

At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (standard) 11

Widescreen Cockpit Instrument Display

12 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (Widescreen Cockpit)

1 #! Turn signal lights 110

2 6 Restraint system 380

3 ESP OFF 390

ESP 390

4 R Rear fog lamp 110

5 K High beam 110

L Low beam 109

T Parking lamps 109

6 Coolant temperature 382

7 Coolant temperature display 202

8 ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 386

9 Recuperative Brake System, USA only 386

J Brakes (yellow), Canada only 386

A # Electrical malfunction 382

BL Distance warning 389

C ! ABS 390

D Power steering 381

E h Tire pressure monitoring system 392

F 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator

382

G Fuel level 202

H Electric parking brake (red) 386

F USA only

! Canada only

I Brakes (red) 386

$ USA only

J Canada only

J Seat belt 380

K ; Check Engine 382

L Indicator lamp inoperative

At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (Widescreen Cockpit) 13

14 At a glance Overhead control panel

1 Sun visors

2 p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off

114

3 | Switches automatic interior lighting con trol on/off

114

4 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off

114

5 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off

114

6 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off

114

7; me button 232

8 G SOS button 232

9 3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

80

3 Opens/closes the roller sunblind 80

A Inside rearview mirror 118

At a glance Overhead control panel 15

16 At a glance Door operating unit and seat adjustment

1 Operates the memory function 98

2 Adjusts the seats electrically 90

3w Switches the seat heating on/off 93

4 s Switches the seat ventilation on/off 94

5 Locks/unlocks the vehicle 70

6 Opens the door 70

7 p Opens the trunk lid 73

8 Operates the outside mirrors 117

9 W Opens/closes the right side window 77

A W Opens/closes the rear right side win dow

77

B Child safety lock for the rear side windows 64

C W Opens/closes the rear left side window 77

D W Opens/closes the left side window 77

E Adjusts the head restraints 91

F Configures the seat settings 93

G Adjusts the seat backrest inclination 90

H Adjusts the seat height 90

I Adjusts the seat cushion inclination 90

J Sets the seat fore-and-aft position 90

K Adjusts the seat cushion length 90

At a glance Door operating unit and seat adjustment 17

18 At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns

1 Safety vests 265

2; me button 232

G SOS button 232

3 Hazard warning light system 111

4 Glove box

5 Starting assistance 276

6 Checking and refilling operating fluids 323

7 Tow-starting or towing away 279

8 Flat tire 266

9 B-pillar with:

QR code for accessing the rescue card 30

A Tow-starting or towing away 279

B TIREFIT kit 268

C First-aid kit (soft sided) 266

D Fuel filler flap with:

information label on fuel type 142

Information label on tire pressure 290

QR code for accessing the rescue card 30

E Warning triangle 265

At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns 19

Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual Multimedia system: 4 5 Info 5 Operator's Manual 5

The Digital Operator's Manual describes the functions and operation of the vehicle and the multimedia system. # Select one of the following menu items in the

Digital Operator's Manual: R Search: search for keywords in order to find

quick answers to questions about the opera tion of the vehicle.

R Quick start: here is where you find the first steps towards setting up your vehicle. R Tips: find information that prepares you for

certain everyday situations with your vehicle. R Animations: watch animations of the vehicle

functions. R Messages: receive additional information

about the messages in the Instrument Dis play. R Bookmarks: gain access to your personally

saved bookmarks. R Language: select the language for the Digital

Operator's Manual.

1 Back 2 Adds bookmarks 3 Picture 4 Contents section 5 Directions of movement of contents section 6 Menu

Some sections in the Digital Operator's Manual, e.g. warning notes, can be expanded and col lapsed. Additional methods of calling up the Digital Operator's Manual: Direct access: open the required content in the Digital Operator's Manual by pressing and hold

20 Digital Operator's Manual

ing an entry on the tab bar in the multimedia system:

Instrument Display: call up brief information as display messages in the instrument cluster Voice Control System: call up via the voice control system For safety reasons, the Digital Operator's Man ual is deactivated while driving.

Digital Operator's Manual 21

Protecting the environment

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style

The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the way you operate the vehicle. Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the envi ronment. Please observe the following rec ommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style. Operating conditions: # Make sure that the tire pressure is cor

rect. # Do not carry any unnecessary weight

(e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them).

# Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib ute to environmental protection.

# Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style: # Do not depress the accelerator pedal

when starting the engine. # Do not warm up the engine while the

vehicle is stationary. # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable

distance from the vehicle in front. # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration

and braking. # Change gear in good time and use each

gear only up to of its maximum engine speed.

# Switch off the engine in stationary traf fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function.

# Drive fuel-efficiently. Observe the ECO display for a fuel-efficient driving style.

Environmental issues and recommendations It is recommended that you re-use or recycle materials instead of just disposing of them. The relevant environmental guidelines and regu lations serve to protect the environment and must be strictly observed.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to not using recycled recon ditioned components

MercedesBenz AG offers recycled recondi tioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts. # Use recycled reconditioned compo

nents and parts from MercedesBenz AG.

22 General notes

* NOTE Impairment of the operating effi ciency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding

Airbags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the fol lowing areas of your vehicle: R Doors R Door pillars R Door sills R Seats R Cockpit R Instrument cluster R Center console R Lateral roof frame

# Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas.

# Do not carry out repairs or welding.

# Have aftermarket installation of acces sories carried out at a qualified special ist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-rele vant systems, e.g. the brake system, may mal function. Only use Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model. Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are subject to strict quality inspections. Each part has been specially developed, manufactured or selected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and adapted to them. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts should be used. More than 300,000 different Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts for

necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers pro vide for quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (/ page 322) when ordering Mercedes- Benz GenuineParts.

Operator's Manual This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for your vehicle at the time of this Operator's Man ual going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illus trations. The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of all of the systems in your vehi cle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

General notes 23

The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada

When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points: R Service points or replacement parts may not

be available immediately. R Unleaded fuel may not be available for vehi

cles with a catalytic converter. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. R The fuel may have an extremely low octane

number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For more information, please consult an author ized MercedesBenz service center, or write to one of the following address: In the USA:

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Maintenance

Your customer advisor confirms the service in the service report.

Roadside Assistance

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro gram offers technical help in the case of a breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA)

1-800-387-0100 (Canada) You can find further information in the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu ment wallet.

Change of address or change of ownership

In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of address change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) on the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus tomer Service (Canada) on 1-800-387-0100. We can then reach you in a timely fashion, if neces sary. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all litera ture in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used vehi cle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of Used Car" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer

24 General notes

Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus tomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Possible danger due to substances hazard ous to health

In compliance with Proposition 65 ("Prop65"), the following detachable label has been added to each vehicle sold in California:

Operating safety

& WARNING Risk of accident due to mal functions or system failures

To avoid malfunctions or system failures: # Always have the prescribed service and

maintenance work as well any required repairs carried out at a qualified spe cialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to incorrect modifications on electronic component parts

Modification of electronic components, their software or wiring could impair their function and/or the function of other networked com ponent parts or safety-relevant systems. This can endanger the operating safety of the vehicle. # Never tamper with the wiring and elec

tronic component parts or their soft ware.

# You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data".

& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust system

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on unpaved roads or off-

road, regularly check the vehicle under side.

# Remove trapped plants or other flam mable material, in particular.

# If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

General notes 25

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driv ing too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody or suspension compo nents

In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle: R The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a

high curb or an unpaved road R The vehicle is driven too fast over an

obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pot hole R A heavy object strikes the underbody or

suspension components

In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tires may not be visible. Compo nents damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no lon ger absorb the resulting force as intended. If the underbody paneling is damaged, flam mable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and

the underbody paneling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # Have the vehicle checked and repaired

immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

or # If driving safety is impaired while con

tinuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist work shop.

Declaration of conformity for wireless vehi cle components USA: "Radio based devices of this vehicle com ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications

not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "This vehicle contains license-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Inno vation, Science and Economic Development Can adas RSS(s). Operation is subject to the follow ing two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device." USA: "Wireless charging system for mobile devi ces (model: WMI2 Wireless Mobile Interface): This device complies with Part 18 of the FCC Rules." The name and address of the responsible party is: peiker acustic GmbH Max-Planck-Str. 28-32 61381 Friedrichsdorf Germany

26 General notes

Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is a technical inter face in the vehicle. It is used, for example, within the scope of repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data by a specialist work shop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only be connected by a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to con necting devices to the diagnostics con nection

If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired. # For safety reasons, we recommend that

you only use and connect products approved by your authorized Mercedes- Benz Center.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely

so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

# Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

* NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection

Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery. # Check the charge level of the battery.

# If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance.

Connecting and using another device with the diagnostics connection can have the following effects: R Malfunctions in the vehicle system R Permanent damage to vehicle components

General notes 27

Please refer to the warranty terms and condi tions for this matter. Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnos tics connection can lead to emissions monitor ing information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to cor rectly carry out the work required on your vehi cle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant works. For the following, always have your vehicle checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen ter: R Safety-relevant works R Service and maintenance work R Repair work

R Modifications as well as installations and conversions R Work on electronic components

MercedesBenz recommends a MercedesBenz service center.

Correct use of the vehicle If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle: R the safety notes in this manual R technical data for the vehicle R traffic rules and regulations R laws and safety standards pertaining to

motor vehicles

Notes for persons with electronic medical aids Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers. In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that, regardless of the operating sta tus of the vehicle, can generate magnetic fields on a par with permanent magnets. These fields can be found, for example, in the area around the multimedia and sound system or also in the area of the seats, depending on the vehicle equipment. For this reason, the following can occur in isola ted cases, depending on the aids used: R Medical aids malfunctioning R Adverse health effects

Observe the notes and warnings of the manufac turer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possi bility of medical aids malfunctioning, Mercedes-

28 General notes

Benz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance from the components. Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out by a qualified specialist workshop: R Vehicle components carrying live voltage R Transmission antenna R Multimedia system and sound system

If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti fied. If the problem is not resolved to your satis faction, please discuss the problem again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec essary, contact us at one of the following addresses:

In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defects

USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to the https:// www.safercar.gov/; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590,: USA. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from: https:// www.safercar.gov

Canada only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under subsection 18.4 (4) of the Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations.

General notes 29

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Trans port Canada in addition to notifying Mercedes- Benz Canada Inc. If Transport Canada received similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. To contact Transport Canada, you may call the Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll- free in Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or 819-994-3328in the Gatineau-Ottawa area or internationally; you may also go to the following websites for more information: R English: https://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls R French: https://www.tc.gc.ca/rappels

Limited Warranty

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instruc tions.

Damage to the vehicle can arise from viola tion of these operating instructions. This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. # Follow the instructions in these operat

ing instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehi cle damage.

QR code for rescue card QR codes are attached in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card con tains the most important information about your

vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines. Further information can be obtained at https:// www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.

Data storage Data processing in the vehicle

Electronic control units Electronic control units are installed in your vehi cle. Control units process data which, for exam ple, they receive from vehicle sensors, generate themselves or exchange between themselves. Some control units are required for the safe operation of your vehicle, some assist you when driving, such as driver assistance systems, while others enable comfort or infotainment functions. The following provides you with general informa tion regarding data processing in the vehicle. Additional information regarding exactly which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties and for what pur pose, can be found in the information directly related to the functional characteristics in ques

30 General notes

tion in their respective operating instructions. This information is also available on line and, depending on the vehicle equipment, digitally.

Personal data Every vehicle is identified by a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the coun try, this vehicle identification number can be used by, for example, governmental authorities to determine the identity of the owner. There are other possibilities to use data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as the license plate number. Therefore, data generated or processed by con trol units may be attributable to a person or, under certain conditions, become attributable to a person. Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make inferences about, for example, your driving behavior, your location, your route or your use patterns.

Legal requirements regarding the disclosure of data If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide gov ernmental entities, upon request and to the

extent required, data stored by the manufac turer. For example, this may be the case during the investigation of a criminal offense. Governmental entities are themselves, in individ ual cases and within the applicable legal frame work, authorized to read out data from the vehi cle. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the airbag control unit, for example.

Operational data in the vehicle This is data regarding the operation of the vehi cle, which have been processed by control units. This includes the following data, for example: R Vehicle status information such as the speed,

longitudinal acceleration, lateral accelera tion, number of wheel revolutions or the fas tened seat belts display R Ambient conditions, such as temperature,

rain sensor or distance sensor

Generally, the use of these data is temporary; they will not be stored beyond the period of operation and will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Control units often contain data

memories for vehicle keys, for example. Their use permits the temporary or permanent docu mentation of technical information about the vehicle's operating state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or malfunctions. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow ing data are stored: R Operating status of system components,

such as fill levels, tire pressure or battery status R Malfunctions or faults in important system

components, such as lights or brakes R System reactions in special driving situa

tions, such as airbag deployment or the inter vention of stability control systems R Information on events leading to vehicle

damage

In certain cases, it may be required to store data that would have otherwise been used only tem porarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, for example.

General notes 31

If you use services, such as repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data as well as the vehicle identification number can be read out and used. They can be read out by service network employees, such as workshops and manufacturers or third parties, such as breakdown services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance measures. In general, the read out is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics con nection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out document technical states of the vehicle or of individual components and assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. To that end, these data, in particular information about component loads, technical events, mal functions and other faults may be transmitted along with the vehicle identification number to the manufacturer. Furthermore, the manufac turer is subject to product liability. For this rea son the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle, for example, for recalls. These

data can also be used to examine the custom er's warranty and guarantee claims. Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work.

Convenience and infotainment functions You can store convenience settings and individ ual settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings, for example: R Seat and steering wheel positions R Suspension and climate control settings R Individual settings, such as interior lighting

Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle infotainment functions yourself. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following data, for example: R Multimedia data, such as music, films or pho

tos for playback in an integrated multimedia system

R Address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an inte grated navigation system R Entered navigation destinations R Data about the use of Internet services

These data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they may be located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time. This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third parties only at your request. This applies, in par ticular, when you use online services in accord ance with the settings that you have selected.

Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or Apple CarPlay) If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smart phone can be output via the multimedia system.

32 General notes

Certain information is simultaneously transfer red to your smartphone. Depending on the type and integration, this includes position data, the day/night mode and other general vehicle sta tuses. For more information please consult the Operator's Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system. This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps, such as navigation or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in par ticular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The type of additional data processing is deter mined by the provider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the specific app and the operating system of your smartphone.

Online services

Wireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connec tion, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wire less network connection is made possible by the

vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, for example, a smartphone. Online func tions can be used via the wireless network con nection. This includes online services and appli cations/apps provided to you by the manufac turer or by other providers.

Manufacturer's services Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, for example, in the Operator's Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection information is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data are exchanged via a secure connection, such as the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which are collected, processed and used, other than for the provision of serv ices, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, for example, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a con tractual agreement or when consent has been given.

You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactiva ted. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system.

Third party services If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsi bility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufac turer has no influence on the content exchanged. For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of per sonal data.

Data protection rights

Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on offer, you are entitled to different data protection rights. Further information on data protection

General notes 33

and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and service offers. There you will also find the contact information for the manufac turer and its data protection officers. At a workshop, for example, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle.

MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect

If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX multi media system or Mercedes me connect, addi tional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the loca tion of the vehicle may be compiled by the MBUX multimedia system or Mercedes me con nect. For additional information, please refer to the "MBUX multimedia system" section and/or the Mercedes me connect Terms and Conditions.

Event data recorders

USA only: This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like sit uations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under standing how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: R How various systems in your vehicle were

operating R Whether or not the driver and front

passenger seat belts were buckled/fastened R How far (if at all) the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal and R How fast the vehicle was traveling

This data can help provide a better understand ing of the circumstances in which accidents and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by

your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and accident location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval (CDR) tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel.

34 General notes

MBUSA will not share EDR data with others with out the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the les see. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter ing, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys tem Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of December 2016, 17 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Copyright Free and open source software

Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Registered trademarks

R Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue tooth SIG, Inc. R DTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. R Dolby and MLP are registered trademarks

of DOLBY Laboratories. R ESP and PRE-SAFE are registered trade

marks of Daimler AG. R HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen

tex Corporation. R iPod and iTunes are registered trademarks

of Apple Inc.

R Burmester is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. R Microsoft and Windows Media are regis

tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. R SIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius

XM Radio Inc. R HD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq

uity Digital Corporation. R Gracenote is a registered trademark of

Gracenote, Inc. R ZAGAT Survey and related brands are regis

tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.

General notes 35

Restraint system Protection provided by the restraint system

The restraint system includes the following com ponents: R Seat belt system R Airbags R Child restraint system R Child seat securing systems

The restraint system can help prevent the vehi cle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected. A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, Emergency Tension ing Devices and/or airbags supplement the pro tection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or airbags are not deployed in every accident.

In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occu pant must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with

their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos

sible. R Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m)

tall in an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

However, no system available today can com pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying.

Reduced restraint system protection

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system

Vehicle occupants may no longer be protec ted as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system. # Never alter the parts of the restraint

system. # Never tamper with the wiring or any

electronic component parts or their software.

If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom modate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for details, contact our Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (18003676372).

Restraint system functionality

When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the 6 restraint sys

36 Occupant safety

tem warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional.

Malfunctioning restraint system

A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys tem if: R The 6 restraint system warning lamp

does not light up when the ignition is switched on R The 6 restraint system warning lamp

lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc tions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and

repaired immediately at a qualified spe cialist workshop.

Function of the restraint system in an acci dent

How the restraint system works is determined by the severity of the impact detected and the type of accident anticipated: R Frontal impact R Rear impact R Side impact R Rollover

The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre- emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the colli sion. Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a deci sive role in the deployment of an airbag. Nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly with out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if

only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in sufficiently high levels of vehicle decel eration. Depending on the detected deployment situa tion, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other: R Emergency Tensioning Device: frontal

impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: fron

tal impact R Knee airbag: frontal impact R Side airbag: side impact R Window curtain airbag: side impact, rollover,

frontal impact

The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat

Occupant safety 37

is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 47).

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag components

The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. # Do not touch the air bag parts. # Have a deployed air bag replaced at a

qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, partic ularly if an Emergency Tensioning Device is trig gered or an airbag deployed. If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig gered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: R The bang will not generally affect your hear

ing.

R In general, the powder released is not haz ardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties.

Airbags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling or environmental pro tection measures. National guidelines regarding waste disposal must be observed. In California, see https://dtsc.ca.gov/. Using the search function, you will find information on perchlo rate, for example.

Seat belts Protection provided by the seat belt

Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt

If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can not perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly. # Always ensure that all vehicle occu

pants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.

Always observe the instructions about the cor rect driver's seat position and adjusting the seat (/ page 87). In order for the correctly worn seat belt to pro vide the intended level of protection, each vehi cle occupant must observe the following infor mation: R The seat belt must not be twisted and must

fit tightly and snugly across the body.

38 Occupant safety

R The seat belt must be routed across the cen ter of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible. R The shoulder section of the seat belt should

not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter

coat. R Push the lap belt down as far as possible

across your hips and pull tight with the shoul der section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. Pregnant women must also take particular care with this. R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin

ted, abrasive or fragile objects. R Only one person should use each seat belt at

any one time. Never allow babies and chil dren to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the

seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when

securing objects, luggage or loads (/ page 98). Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat.

The seat belts on the following seats are equip ped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats

Activate or deactivate the special seatbelt retractor (/ page 56). If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 52).

Limitations of the protection provided by the seat belt

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. You could slip beneath the seat belt and injure yourself. # Adjust the seat properly before com

mencing your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is

in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature

Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m ) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system.

Occupant safety 39

# Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint sys tem.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts

Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations: R The seat belt is damaged, has been modi

fied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed R The seat belt buckle is damaged or

extremely dirty R Modifications have been made to the

Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to function as intended.

# Never modify the seat belt system, for example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor.

# Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean.

# Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop.

Only use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Ten sioning Devices

Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer opera tional and are unable to perform their inten ded protective function. # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic

Emergency Tensioning Devices immedi ately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident.

* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt

If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. # Always ensure that an unused seat belt

is fully retracted.

Fastening seat belts

If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can not be pulled out any further.

40 Occupant safety

# Always engage seat belt tongue2 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle1 of the cor responding seat.

Vehicles with automatic front passenger air bag shutoff:

* NOTE Deployment of the Emergency Tensioning Device and side air bag when the front passenger seat is unoccupied

If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the unoccupied front passenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning Device and the side air bag may also deploy in the event of an accident along with other systems. # Only one person should use each seat

belt at any one time.

Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff:

* NOTE Deployment of the Emergency Tensioning Device when the front- passenger seat is unoccupied

If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the unoccupied front- passenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning Device may also deploy in the event of an accident along with other systems.

# Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.

Seat belt adjustment function

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE: After a front seat belt has been fastened, the automatic seat belt adjustment may apply a certain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia sys tem (/ page 41).

Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Belt Adjustment.

Occupant safety 41

Releasing seat belts

# Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue.

Seat belt warning function for the driver and front passenger

The seat belt warning lamp in the instru ment display is a reminder that all vehicle occu pants must wear their seat belts correctly. The seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds every time the vehicle is started. In addition, a warning tone may sound. When the driver's and front passenger's doors are closed and the driver and front passenger have fastened their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out. In the following cases, the seat belt warning lights up during a journey if: R The vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph

(25 km/h) and the driver's or front passenger seat belt is not fastened.

R The driver or front passenger unfastens their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.

Airbags Overview of airbags

1 Driver's knee airbag 2 Driver's airbag 3 Front passenger airbag 4 Front passenger knee airbag 5 Window curtain airbag 6 Side airbag

The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant. Potential protection provided by each airbag: R Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head

and ribcage R Window curtain airbag: head R Side airbag: ribcage and pelvis

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co-driver airbag is enabled

If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the co- driver airbag during an accident.

42 Occupant safety

NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe cific information (/ page 61). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat.

Information on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 47).

* NOTE Important points to remember if the front passenger seat is unoccupied

In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if: R There are heavy objects on the front

passenger seat. R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the

seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied.

# Stow objects in a suitable place. # Only one person should use each seat

belt at any one time.

Depending on the detected accident situation, the window curtain airbag on the front passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied.

Protective capacity of the airbags

Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection offered by a cor rectly fastened seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended pro tective function. Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following: R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant

women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen. R Adopt the correct seat position and keep

as far away as possible from the airbags. R Observe the following information.

# Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant.

Occupant safety 43

To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular: R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat

correctly; the driver's seat and front passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible. When doing so, always observe the informa tion on the correct driver's seat position (/ page 87). R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering

wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. R Always lean against the seat backrest when

the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. R The occupants must always keep their feet

on the floor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may other wise be in the deployment area of the airbag. R If children are traveling in the vehicle,

observe the additional notes (/ page 52).

R Always store and secure objects correctly.

Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the follow ing in particular: R There are no people, animals or objects

between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. R There are no objects between the seat, door

and door pillar (B-pillar). R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,

hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. R There are no accessory parts, such as mobile

navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within the deployment area of an air bag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side trim. In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deploy ment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation.

R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.

Limited protection provided by airbags

& WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi cations to the cover of an airbag

If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may no longer function correctly. # Never modify the cover of an airbag and

do not affix objects to it.

The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 42).

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers

Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as inten ded.

44 Occupant safety

In addition, the operation of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff could be restricted. # You should only use seat covers that

have been approved for the correspond ing seats by Mercedes-Benz.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc tioning sensors in the door

The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or incorrect work per formed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged. # Never modify the doors or parts of the

doors. # Always have work on the doors or door

trim carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag

A deployed airbag no longer offers any pro tection.

# Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced.

Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.

Status of the front passenger front airbag

Function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint sys tem. The front passenger airbag and front passenger knee airbag are enabled or disabled accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat

Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff or damage the sys tem.

# Do not store any objects under the co- driver seat.

# When the co-driver seat is occupied, make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat.

When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always make sure of the following: R Ensure that the child restraint system is posi

tioned correctly (/ page 51). R Always comply with the child restraint sys

tem manufacturer's installation instructions. R Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or

behind the child restraint system. R Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust

ment. R The entire base of the child restraint system

must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat. R The backrest of the forward-facing child

restraint system must, as far as possible, be

Occupant safety 45

resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. R The child restraint system must not touch the

roof or be put under strain by the head restraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclina tion and the head restraint setting accord ingly.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system

Objects between the sitting surface and the child restraint system could affect the func tion of the automatic co-driver airbag shut off. # Do not place any objects between the

sitting surface and the child restraint system.

# The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the co-driver seat.

# The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possi

ble, be resting on the seat backrest of the co-driver seat.

# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 38). R Sit in an almost upright seat position with

their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos

sible.

The front passenger airbag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example, in the follow ing situations: R The front passenger transfers their weight by

supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest. R The front passenger sits in such a way that

their weight is raised from the sitting sur face.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag

The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the

front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The front passenger seat has been moved

as far back as possible. R The person is seated correctly.

# Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

46 Occupant safety

If the front passenger seat is occupied, the clas sification of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat takes place after the front passenger airbag shutoff self-test. The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger airbag. Always observe the notes on the function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (/ page 47).

Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica tor lamps

Self-test of automatic front passenger airbag shutoff When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed during which the two PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously.

The status of the front passenger airbag is dis played via the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps after the self-test: R ON is lit: the front passenger airbag may

deploy during an accident. The indicator lamp goes out after approx imately 60 seconds. R ON and OFF are not lit: the front passenger

airbag may deploy during an accident. R OFF is lit: the front passenger airbag is disa

bled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front passenger airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag

Occupant safety 47

shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Status display If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the sta tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation. After installing a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit con tinuously.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag.

Always ensure that the front passenger air bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe cific information (/ page 61). Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do not install the rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Instead, install the rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. After installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off. Always observe the following information.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forward- facing child restraint system

If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat that is positioned too close to the cockpit, in the event of an accident, the child could: R come into contact with parts of the vehi

cle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off

# Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. While doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If

48 Occupant safety

necessary, adjust the front passenger seat accordingly.

# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe cific information (/ page 61). If a person is sitting on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con tinuously or be off, depending on the person's stature. A person on the front passenger seat must always observe the following information: R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an

adult or a person with a stature correspond ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This indicates that the front passenger airbag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person

with a build corresponding to that of an adult should not use the front passenger seat. Instead, they should use a rear seat. R If the front passenger seat is occupied by a

person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp either lights up continuously or remains off, depending on the classifica tion. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is off: move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or the per son of smaller stature should use a rear seat.

- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: the person of smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the self-test, the front passenger airbag is disabled. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the

front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The person is seated properly with a cor

rectly fastened seat belt.

Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Child restraint system on the front passenger

seat (/ page 61)

Occupant safety 49

PRE-SAFE system PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protec tion)

PRE-SAFE is able to detect certain critical driv ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas ures to protect the vehicle occupants.

PRE-SAFE can implement the following meas ures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat

and front passenger seat. R Closing the side windows. R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: Close the

sliding sunroof. R Vehicles with memory function: Move the

front passenger seat to a more favorable seat position. R PRE-SAFE Sound: provided that the multi

media system is switched on, generates a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro tective mechanism of a person's hearing.

* NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat

The automatic adjustment of the seat posi tion may result in damage to the seat and/or the object. # Stow objects in a suitable place.

Reversing the PRE-SAFE system measures

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings your self. # If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced,

move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases.

Function of PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)

PRE-SAFE PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle

occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact.

PRE-SAFE PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat

and front passenger seat. R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle

is stationary. This brake application is can celed automatically when the vehicle pulls away.

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed.

System limits The system will not initiate any action in the fol lowing situations: R When backing up

The system will not initiate any braking applica tion in the following situations: R Whilst driving

or

50 Occupant safety

R When entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking Assist

Automatic measures after an accident Depending on the type and severity of the acci dent, and depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following measures can be implemented, for example: R Automatic braking (post-collision brake) R Activating the hazard warning lights R Triggering an automatic emergency call

(/ page 239) R Switching off the engine

To restart the vehicle, switch the ignition off and switch it back on (/ page 126). Depending on the type and severity of the accident, it is possible that the vehicle can no longer be started. R Switching off the fuel supply R Unlocking the vehicle doors R Lowering the side windows

R Displaying the emergency guide in the multi media system display R Switching on the interior lighting

Function of the post-collision brake Depending on the accident situation, the post- collision brake can minimize the severity of a fur ther collision or even avoid it. If an accident is detected, the post-collision brake can implement automatic braking. When the vehicle has come to a standstill, the electric parking brake is automatically applied. The driver can cancel automatic braking by tak ing the following actions: R Braking more strongly than automatic brak

ing R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal with

force

Safely transporting children in the vehicle Always observe when children are traveling in the vehicle

% Also strictly observe the safety notes for the specific situation. In this way you can recog nize potential risks and avoid dangers if chil dren are traveling in the vehicle (/ page 52).

Be diligent Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have seri ous consequences. Always be diligent in secur ing a child carefully before every journey. To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information: R Always secure the child in a child restraint

system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi cle. R The child restraint system must be appropri

ate to the age, weight and size of the child.

Occupant safety 51

R The vehicle seat must be suitable for instal ling a child restraint system.

Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than chil dren secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat.

The generic term child restraint system The generic term child restraint system is used in this Operator's Manual. A child restraint sys tem is, for example: R A baby car seat R A rearward-facing child seat R A forward-facing child seat R A child booster seat with a backrest and seat

belt guide Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest.

The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.

Observe laws and legal requirements Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle.

Observe standards for child restraint sys tems All child restraint systems must meet the follow ing standards: R U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

213 and 225 R Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint system complies with the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the instal lation instructions that are included with the child restraint system.

Detecting risks, avoiding danger

Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems: R The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings R The vehicle's seat belt system R The Top Tether anchorages

Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is favored. Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of installing the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint sys tem (/ page 56). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a

52 Occupant safety

height where a three-point seat belt can be installed properly without a booster seat. Mercedes-Benz recommends a suitable child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide.

Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the oppo site direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards. Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer vical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system.

Always secure a child restraint system cor rectly

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system

The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended. # Be sure to comply with the manufactur

er's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use.

# Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat.

# Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint sys tem.

# Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them.

# Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle

If the child restraint system is incorrectly installed or not secured, it can come loose. The child restraint system could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Always install child restraint systems

correctly, even when not in use. # Always comply with the child restraint

system manufacturer's installation instructions.

R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the vehicle-specific information: - Installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child

restraint system on the rear seat (/ page 56).

- Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 60).

Occupant safety 53

- Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat (/ page 62). Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 61). If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the jour ney, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the cur rent situation (/ page 47).

R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. R Also secure Top Tether if present.

Do not modify the child restraint system

& WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi cations to the child restraint system

The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury. # Never modify a child restraint system.

# Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer.

Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition

& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems

Child restraint systems or their retaining sys tems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function. It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained. # Always immediately replace child

restraint systems that have been dam aged or involved in an accident.

# Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again.

Avoid direct sunlight

& WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight

If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly on the metallic parts of the child restraint system. # Always make sure that the child

restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight.

# Protect the child restraint system, e.g. with a blanket.

# If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child in it.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

54 Occupant safety

Observe when stopping or parking

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf

fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

& WARNING Danger to life due to expo sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehi cle

If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in partic

ular, unattended in the vehicle.

Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for installing a child restraint system

Left/right rear seat Preferred securing system: LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchor

Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 58).

Alternative securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt

Front passenger seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt

Be sure to observe: R If the front passenger seat is occupied,

ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 47). R Observe the notes on automatic front

passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 45)

Center rear seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt Also secure Top Tether if present

(/ page 58).

Occupant safety 55

Activating or deactivating the special seal belt retractor of the seat belt

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion

If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is in motion, the child safety lock is deactivated and the child restraint system is no longer correctly secured. The seat belt is drawn in slightly by the inertia reel and cannot be immediately closed again. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accord

ance with the traffic conditions. # Activate the special seal belt retractor

again and correctly secure the child restraint system.

When enabled, the special seal belt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured.

The seat belts on the following seats are equip ped with a special seal belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats

# To install a child restraint system: when installing a child restraint system, always observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the informa tion in this Operator's Manual.

# Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt outlet.

# Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt buckle.

# To activate the special seal belt retrac tor: pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. When the special seal belt retractor is activa ted, you will hear a ratcheting sound.

# Push the child restraint system down until the seat belt sits tightly.

# To deactivate the special seal belt retrac tor: press the release button of the seat belt buckle.

# Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to the seat belt outlet.

Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat

Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat

& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back rest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be

pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo

compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest.

56 Occupant safety

# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indica tor will be visible.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is exceeded

The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing systems may be overloaded and the child may not be restrained in the event of an acci dent, for example. # If the child and the child restraint sys

tem together weigh more than the per missible gross mass of 73 lb (33 kg), use only a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system that secures the child with the vehicle seat belt.

# Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.

Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system: R In the manufacturer's installation and operat

ing instructions for the child restraint system used R On a label on the child restraint system, if

present

Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with. When installing a child restraint system, observe the following: O Always observe the correct use of the seats

and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system.

O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.

O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.

When installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, also observe the follow ing: O When using a baby car seat in weight

group 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child restraint system in weight group I on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint sys tem.

O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight group I: remove the head restraint from the respec tive seat, if possible. In addition, the back rest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints again immediately and adjust them correctly.

O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys tems in weight category II or III.

Occupant safety 57

Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.

1 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting bracket

Before every journey, make sure that the LATCH- type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehi cle.

* NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the center seat during installation of the child restraint system

# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap ped.

# Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system to both mounting brackets in the vehicle.

Securing Top Tether

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked after Top Tether belts are installed

The rear seat backrests may fold forwards when you are driving. As a result, child restraint systems will no longer be able to perform their intended pro tective function. This may also cause addi tional injuries.

58 Occupant safety

# Always lock rear seat backrests after installing Top Tether belts.

# Observe the lock verification indicator.

If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indica tor will be visible. If the child restraint system is equipped

with a Top Tether belt: The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with LATCH- type (ISOFIX) and the vehicle.

# Fold up cover2 of Top Tether anchorage 3.

Vehicles with adjustable head restraints: # If necessary, slide head restraint1 upwards

(/ page 92). # Guide Top Tether belt4 under head

restraint1 between the two head restraint bars.

Vehicles without adjustable head restraints: # Top Tether belt with one seat belt strap:

guide Top Tether belt4 over the center of head restraint1.

or # Top Tether belt with two seat belt straps:

guide one Top Tether belt4 past head restraint1 on the right and left sides respectively.

All vehicles: # Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint

system with Top Tether. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufactur er's installation instructions.

Occupant safety 59

# Hook Top Tether hook5 of Top Tether belt 4 into Top Tether anchorage3 without twisting.

# Tension Top Tether belt4. In doing so, com ply with the child restraint system manufac turer's installation instructions.

# Fold down cover2 of Top Tether anchorage 3.

Vehicles with adjustable head restraints: # If necessary, slide head restraint1 down

wards (/ page 92). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt4.

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat

& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back rest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be

pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo

compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest.

# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indica tor will be visible.

When installing a belt-secured child restraint system, observe the following: O Always comply with the manufacturer's

installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.

O When using a weight category 0/0+ baby car seat and a weight category I rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system.

O When using a weight category I forward- facing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints again immediately and adjust them correctly.

O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be

60 Occupant safety

resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat.

O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys tems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.

O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.

The seat belts on the following seats are equip ped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats

When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured (/ page 56). # Install the child restraint system.

The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the rear seat.

# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for wards and downwards from the seat belt out let.

Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. Always ensure that the front passenger air bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Occupant safety 61

Observe the specific instructions for the rear ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 62). Always observe the status of the front passenger airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica tor lamp: R When using a rearward-facing child restraint

system on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (/ page 47). R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is off, the front passenger airbag is ena bled. The front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident.

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat When installing a belt-secured child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the following: O Observe the notes on rearward-facing and

forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 61).

O Observe the child restraint system manufac turer's installation and operating instruc tions.

O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints again immediately and adjust them correctly.

O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat.

O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the

vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys tems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction.

O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.

O Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.

The seat belt on the front passenger side is equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt does not slacken once the child seat is secured (/ page 56).

62 Occupant safety

# Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position if possible.

# Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the back edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.

# Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible.

# Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat.

# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for wards and downwards from the seat belt out let.

# If necessary, adjust the front passenger seat accordingly.

Child safety locks

Activating or deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf

fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

& WARNING Danger to life due to expo sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehi cle

If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in partic

ular, unattended in the vehicle.

Occupant safety 63

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf

fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

# Always activate the installed child safety locks if children are traveling in the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear passenger compartment side win dows.

The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside.

# Press the lever in direction1 (activate) or 2 (deactivate).

# Make sure that the child safety locks are working properly.

Activating or deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows

# To activate/deactivate: press button2. The rear side window can be opened or closed in the following cases: R Indicator lamp1 is lit: via the switch on

the driver's door

64 Occupant safety

R Indicator lamp1 is off: via the switch on the corresponding rear door or driver's door

Notes on pets in the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unat tended in the vehicle

If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten ded or unsecured, they could possibly press buttons or switches. An animal may: R Activate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example R Switch systems on or off and endanger

other road users

Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering and braking maneuvers and injure vehicle occupants in the process.

# Never leave animals in the vehicle unat tended.

# Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car rier.

Occupant safety 65

SmartKey Overview of SmartKey functions

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf

fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

* NOTE Damage to the SmartKey caused by magnetic fields

# Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields.

1 Locks 2 Indicator lamp

3 Unlocks 4 Opens the trunk lid 5 Panic alarm

% If indicator lamp2 does not light up after pressing the or button, the bat tery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the battery as soon as possible.

Replace the SmartKey battery (/ page 68). The SmartKey locks and unlocks the following components: R Doors R Fuel filler flap R Trunk lid

If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Anti- theft protection is armed again. Do not keep the SmartKey together with elec tronic devices or metal objects. This can affect the SmartKey's functionality.

66 Opening and closing

Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Acoustic Lock.

Activating/deactivating the panic alarm

Requirements: R The ignition is switched off.

# To activate: press button1 for approx imately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered.

# To deactivate: briefly press button1 again. or # Press the start/stop button on the cockpit,

with the SmartKey inside the vehicle.

Changing the unlocking settings

Possible unlocking functions of the SmartKey: R Central unlocking R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap

# To switch between settings: press the and buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes twice.

Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap has been selected: R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the button twice. R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch

the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and fuel filler flap are unlocked.

Deactivating the SmartKey functions

If you do not use the vehicle or a SmartKey for an extended period of time, you can reduce the energy consumption of the respective SmartKey. To do so, deactivate the SmartKey functions. # To deactivate: press the button on the

SmartKey twice in quick succession. The SmartKey indicator lamp flashes twice briefly and lights up once.

# To activate: press any button on the Smart Key.

% When the vehicle is started with the Smart Key in the storage compartment of the cen ter console, the SmartKey functions are automatically activated (/ page 127).

Opening and closing 67

Removing/inserting the emergency key

Removing the emergency key

# Press release knob1. Emergency key2 is pushed out slightly.

# Pull out emergency key2 until it engages in the intermediate position.

% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the intermediate position is not available.

# Press release knob1 again and fully remove emergency key2.

Inserting the emergency key # Press release knob1. # Insert emergency key2 to the intermediate

position or fully until it engages. % You can use the intermediate position of

emergency key2 to attach the SmartKey to a key ring.

Replacing the SmartKey battery

& DANGER Serious damage to health caused by swallowing batteries

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub stances. Swallowing batteries may cause serious damage to health. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil

dren. # If batteries are swallowed, seek medical

attention immediately.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat teries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. #

Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

Requirements: R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist work shop.

68 Opening and closing

# Remove the emergency key (/ page 68).

# Press release knob2 down fully and slide cover1 in the direction of the arrow.

# Fold out cover1 in the direction of the arrow and remove.

# Remove battery compartment3 and take out the discharged battery.

# Insert the new battery into battery compart ment3. Observe the positive pole marking in the battery compartment and on the bat tery when doing this.

# Push in battery compartment3.

# Re-attach cover1 and push it until it engages.

Problems with the SmartKey, troubleshoot ing

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle Possible causes: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. R The SmartKey is faulty.

# Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 66).

# Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 68).

# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 72).

# Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

There is interference from a powerful radio signal source The SmartKey function is impaired by, for exam ple: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R Shielding due to metal objects or induction

loops for electrical gate systems or auto matic barriers

# Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference.

You have lost a SmartKey # Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified

specialist workshop. # If necessary, have the mechanical lock

replaced as well.

Opening and closing 69

Doors Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside

# To unlock and open a front door: pull door handle1.

# To unlock a rear door: pull the rear door handle.

# To open a rear door: pull the rear door han dle again.

Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside

# To unlock: press button1. # To lock: press button2.

The red indicator lamp on button2 on the driver or front passenger door lights up once the vehicle is locked.

% You can also lock and unlock the vehicle with the buttons on the front passenger door and rear doors.

This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. The vehicle is not unlocked: R If you have locked the vehicle using the

SmartKey. R If you have locked the vehicle using KEY

LESS-GO.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEY LESS-GO

Requirements: R The SmartKey is outside the vehicle. R The distance between the SmartKey and the

vehicle does not exceed 3 ft (1 m). R The driver's door and the door at which the

door handle is used are closed.

70 Opening and closing

# To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur face of the door handle.

# To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface 1 or2.

# Convenience closing: touch recessed sen sor surface2 until the closing process has been completed.

% Further information on convenience closing (/ page 79).

If you open the trunk lid from outside, the trunk lid is automatically unlocked.

Problems with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshooting

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Possible causes: R The SmartKey functions have been deactiva

ted. R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. R The SmartKey is faulty.

# Activate the SmartKey functions (/ page 67).

# Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 66).

# Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 68).

# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 72).

# Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

There is interference from a powerful radio signal source The KEYLESS-GO function is impaired by, for example: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R Shielding due to metal objects or induction

loops for electrical gate systems or auto matic barriers

# Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference.

Activating/deactivating the automatic lock ing feature

The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn ing faster than walking pace.

Opening and closing 71

# To activate: press and hold button2 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.

# To deactivate: press and hold button1 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.

The red indicator lamp on button2 lights up once the vehicle is locked.

In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated: R While the vehicle is being tow started/

pushed. R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna

mometer.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the emergency key

Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the emergency key % If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using

the emergency key, first press the button for locking from the inside while the driver's door is open. Then proceed to lock the driv er's door using the emergency key.

# Remove the emergency key (/ page 68). # Insert the emergency key as far as it will go

into opening1 in the cover. # Pull and hold the door handle. # Pull the cover on the emergency key as

straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases.

# Release the door handle.

72 Opening and closing

# To unlock: turn the emergency key counter- clockwise to position1.

# To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to position1.

# Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylin der until it engages and is seated firmly.

Locking the front passenger door and rear doors

# Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergency key, into opening1 on the door lock.

# To lock the left-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key counter-clockwise as far as it will go.

# To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key clockwise as far as it will go.

If the locked door is then closed, it can no longer be opened from the outside.

Trunk Opening the trunk lid

& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before

opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open.

Opening and closing 73

* NOTE Damage to the trunk lid by obsta cles above the vehicle

The trunk lid swings upwards when it is opened. # Therefore, make sure that there is suffi

cient clearance above the trunk lid.

# Pull the trunk lid handle. # Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: Make

a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 75).

# Pull trunk lid remote operating switch1. # Press and hold thep button on the

SmartKey.

Closing the trunk lid

& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that

they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, lug

gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. # Pull the trunk lid downwards using the han

dle recess and push it closed.

74 Opening and closing

HANDS-FREE ACCESS function

With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open the trunk lid by performing a kicking movement under the bumper. Observe the notes when opening the trunk lid (/ page 73).

& WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system

The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system. # Always ensure that you only make a

kicking movement within the detection range of the sensors.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the trunk lid

R When using an automatic car wash R When using a high pressure cleaner

# Deactivate KEYLESS-GO or make sure that the SmartKey located is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle in such situations.

When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice.

Observe the following notes: R The SmartKey is behind the vehicle. R Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the

vehicle while performing the kicking move ment. R Do not come into contact with the bumper

while making the kicking movement. R Do not carry out the kicking movement too

slowly. R The kicking movement must be towards the

vehicle and back again.

1 Detection range of the sensors

Opening and closing 75

If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds.

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following cases: R The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or

snow. R The kicking movement is made using a pros

thetic leg.

The trunk lid could be opened unintentionally, in the following situations: R A person's arms or legs are moving in the

sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects. R Objects are moved or placed behind the vehi

cle, e.g. tensioning straps or luggage. R Clamping straps, tarps or other coverings are

pulled over the bumper. R A protective mat with a length reaching over

the trunk sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used. R The protective mat is not secured correctly.

R Work is being done on the trailer hitch, trail ers or rear-mounted bicycle racks.

Deactivate the SmartKey functions (/ page 67) or do not carry the SmartKey about your person in such situations.

Unlocking and opening the trunk from inside with the emergency release

Requirements: R The 12 V vehicle battery is connected and

charged.

# Press emergency release button1 briefly.

76 Opening and closing

Side windows Opening and closing the side windows

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window

When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody

is touching the side window. # If someone is trapped, release the but

ton immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window

When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process. # When closing, make sure that no body

parts are in the closing area.

# If someone is trapped, release the but ton immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows

Children could become trapped if they oper ate the side windows, particularly when unat tended. # Activate the child safety lock for the

rear passenger compartment side win dows.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Requirements: R The power supply or the ignition is switched

on.

1 To close 2 To open

The buttons on the driver's door take prece dence. # To start automatic operation: press the

W button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.

Opening and closing 77

# To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull theW button again.

When the vehicle is switched off, you can con tinue to operate the side windows. This function is available for around four minutes or until a front door is opened.

Automatic reversing function of the side win dows If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that

no body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window

The reversing function does not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin

gers.

R During resetting.

The reversing function cannot prevent some one from becoming trapped in these situa tions. # During the closing process, make sure

that no body parts are in the closing area.

# If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again.

Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey)

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window

When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody

is touching the side window.

# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

# Press and hold the button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is unlocked. R The side windows are opened. R The panoramic sliding roof is opened. R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is

switched on.

% If the roller sunblind of the panoramic sliding sunroof is closed, the roller sunblind is opened first.

# To interrupt convenience opening: release the button.

# To continue convenience opening: press and hold the button again.

78 Opening and closing

Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside)

& WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing

When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side win dow and the sliding sunroof. # When the convenience closing feature

is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

# Press and hold the button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is locked. R The side windows are closed. R The panoramic sliding roof is closed.

# To interrupt convenience closing: release the button.

# To close the roller sunblinds: press and hold the button again.

% Convenience closing also functions with KEYLESS-GO (/ page 70).

Resolving problems with the side windows

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated

If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped. # Make sure that no parts of the body are

in the closing area. # To stop the closing process, release the

button or press the button again to reopen the side window.

A side window cannot be closed and you can not see the cause. # Check to see whether any objects are in the

window guide. # Adjust the side windows.

Adjusting the side windows If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately: # Immediately after this, pull and hold the cor

responding button again until the side win dow has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately: # Immediately after this, pull and hold the cor

responding button again until the side win dow has closed and hold the button for at

Opening and closing 79

least one more second (follow-up adjust ment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening fea ture. Possible cause: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged.

# Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 66).

# Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 68).

Sliding sunroof Opening and closing the sliding sunroof

% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being opened and closed

Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement. # During opening and closing, make sure

that no body parts are in the range of movement.

# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

or # Briefly press the button in any direction

during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the sliding sunroof is operated by chil dren

Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being opened and closed

Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof. # When opening or closing, make sure

that no body parts are in the roller sun blind's range of movement.

# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

or # Briefly press the button in any direction

during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped.

80 Opening and closing

* NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice

Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction. # Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free

of snow and ice.

* NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects

Objects that protrude from the sliding sun roof may damage the sealing strips. # Do not allow anything to protrude from

the sliding sunroof.

* NOTE Important points to remember when a roof luggage rack is installed

When a roof luggage rack is installed, raising or opening the sliding sunroof may be limi ted. # Check whether the sliding sunroof can

be raised or opened when a roof lug gage rack is installed.

# If in doubt, do not raise or open the sliding sunroof.

1 To raise 2 To open 3 To close/lower

Use the3 button to operate the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can be operated only when the roller sunblind is open. # Check whether the sliding sunroof can be

raised or opened when a roof luggage rack is installed.

# To start automatic operation: press the 3 button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.

# To interrupt automatic operation: briefly press the3 button in any direction. The opening/closing process will be stop ped.

Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: The automatic raising feature is available only when the sliding sunroof is closed or raised.

Opening and closing 81

Automatic reversing function of the sliding sunroof If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof dur ing the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic revers ing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that

no body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite the reversing function being active

In particular, the reversing function does not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin

gers. R Towards the end of the closing proce

dure. R During resetting.

# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

or # Briefly press the button in any direction

during automatic operation. The closing process will be stopped.

Automatic reversing function of the roller sunblind If an obstacle obstructs the roller sunblind dur ing the closing process, the roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic revers ing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # When closing the roller sunblind, make sure

that no body parts are in the range of move ment.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function

In particular, the reversing function does not react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin gers.

# When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.

# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

or # Briefly press the button in any direction

during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped.

Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof

% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.

Rain closing function when driving Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: If it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion.

Automatic lowering function Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will automatically be lowered

82 Opening and closing

slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it will be raised again automatically.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof

At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered slightly at the rear. # Make sure that nobody reaches into the

sliding sunroof's range of movement while the vehicle is in motion.

# If somebody becomes trapped, briefly push the sliding sunroof button for wards or backwards.

% By pushing or pulling the3 button, you can interrupt the automatic functions: "Rain closing function when driving" and "Auto matic lowering".

Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is closed again

If the sliding sunroof is closed again immedi ately after it has been blocked or reset, it will close with increased force. # Make sure that no parts of the body are

in the closing area. # Release the button immediately if

somebody becomes trapped. or # Briefly press the button in any direction

during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped.

The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the

panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:

# Immediately after automatic reversing, pull and hold the3 button down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and opens again slightly: # Repeat the previous step.

The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force.

Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: The sliding sunroof or the roller sunblind is not operating smoothly. # Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sun

blind.

Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind # Pull and hold the3 button little by little

until the sliding sunroof is fully closed. # Pull and hold the3 button little by little

until the roller sunblind is fully closed.

Opening and closing 83

# Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.

Anti-theft protection Function of the immobilizer

The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. The immobilizer is automatically activated when the ignition is switched off and deactivated when the ignition is switched on. When leaving the vehicle, always take the Smart Key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle. % In the event the engine cannot be started

(yet the vehicles battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

Function of the ATA system If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations: R When a door is opened R When the trunk lid is opened R When the hood is opened R When the interior motion sensor is triggered

(/ page 86) R When the tow-away alarm is triggered

(/ page 85)

The ATA system is armed automatically after approximately ten seconds in the following situa tions: R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Indicator lamp1 flashes when the ATA system is armed. The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations: R After unlocking the vehicle with the Smart

Key R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-

GO

84 Opening and closing

R After pressing the start/stop button with the SmartKey in the storage compartment (/ page 127)

% When the MercedesBenz emergency call system is active and the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a message is auto matically sent to the Customer Assistance Center (/ page 239).

% In the case of severe battery discharging, the anti-theft alarm system is automatically deactivated to facilitate the next engine start.

Deactivating the ATA # Press the, orp button on the

SmartKey. or # Press the start/stop button with the Smart

Key in the marked space (/ page 127)

Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO # Grasp the outside door handle with the

SmartKey outside the vehicle.

Function of the tow-away alarm

% This function may not be available in all countries.

An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is detected while the tow-away alarm is armed. The tow-away alarm is automatically armed after approximately 60 seconds: R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

The tow-away alarm is only armed when the fol lowing components are closed: R Doors R Trunk lid

The tow-away alarm is automatically deactiva ted: R After pressing the orp button on

the SmartKey R After pressing the start/stop button with the

SmartKey in the storage compartment (/ page 127)

R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS- GO R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle (/ page 150).

Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Arm or disarm Tow-away Protection. The tow-away alarm is armed again in the follow ing cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again.

% If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle submenu in the Settings main menu to arm or disarm the tow-away alarm.

Opening and closing 85

Function of the interior motion sensor

% This function may not be available in all countries.

When the interior motion sensor is armed, a vis ual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior. The interior motion sensor is armed automati cally after approximately ten seconds: R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

The interior motion sensor is only armed when the following components are closed: R Doors R Trunk lid

The interior motion sensor is automatically deac tivated: R After pressing the orp button on

the SmartKey R After pressing the start/stop button with the

SmartKey in the storage compartment (/ page 127)

R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS- GO R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

The following situations can lead to a false alarm: R Moving objects such as mascots in the vehi

cle interior R When the side window is open R When the panoramic sliding sunroof is open

Arming/deactivating the interior motion sen sor

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Activate or deactivate Interior Motion Sen-

sor. The interior motion sensor is activated again in the following cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again.

% If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle menu under Settings to activate or deactivate the interior motion sensor.

86 Opening and closing

Notes on the correct driver's seat position

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi cle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi

cle is in motion.

# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas ten your seat belt.

Ensure the following when adjusting steering wheel1, seat belt2 and driver's seat3: R You are sitting as far away from the driver's

airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration. R You are sitting in an upright position R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat

cushion

R Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly R The back of your head is supported at eye

level by the center of the head restraint R You can hold the steering wheel with your

arms slightly bent R You can move your legs freely R You can see all the displays on the instru

ment cluster clearly R You have a good overview of the traffic con

ditions R Your seat belt sits snugly against your body

and passes across the center of your shoul der and across your hips in the pelvic area

Seats and stowing 87

Seats Adjusting the front seat mechanically (with out Seat Comfort Package)

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children

Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. # When leaving the vehicle, always take

the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seat

When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that

no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil dren in the vehicle".

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged

The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Always make sure that the driver's seat

is engaged before starting the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi cle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi

cle is in motion.

# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas ten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly

If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that

hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.

88 Seats and stowing

& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly

If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints

installed. # Before driving off, make sure for every

vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. You could slip beneath the seat belt and injure yourself. # Adjust the seat properly before com

mencing your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is

in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever1 and slide the seat into the desired position.

# Make sure that the seat is engaged. # To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever 2 until the desired position has been reached.

Seats and stowing 89

# To adjust the seat backrest inclination: turn handwheel3 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached.

Adjusting the front seat mechanically (with Seat Comfort Package)

# To adjust the seat cushion length: lift lever 1 and slide the front section of the seat cushion forwards or backwards.

# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever2 and slide the seat into the desired position.

# Make sure that the seat is engaged. # To adjust the seat cushion inclination:

turn handwheel3 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached.

# To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever 4 until the desired position has been reached.

# To adjust the seat backrest inclination: turn handwheel5 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached.

Adjusting the front seat electrically

1 Seat backrest inclination 2 Seat height 3 Seat cushion inclination 4 Seat fore-and-aft position

# Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 98).

90 Seats and stowing

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

1 Higher 2 Softer 3 Lower 4 Firmer

# Using buttons1 to4, adjust the contour of the backrest individually to suit your back.

Head restraints

Adjusting the front seat head restraints man ually

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi cle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi

cle is in motion.

# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas ten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly

If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints

installed. # Before driving off, make sure for every

vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

Seats and stowing 91

# To raise: pull the head restraint up. # To lower: press release knob1 in the direc

tion of the arrow and push the head restraint down.

# To move forwards: press release knob2 and pull the head restraint forwards.

# To move backwards: press release knob2 and push the head restraint backwards.

Adjusting the head restraints of the rear seats mechanically

# To raise: pull the head restraint up. # To lower: press release knob1 in the direc

tion of the arrow and push the head restraint down.

Installing/removing the rear seat head restraints

Removing

# Release the rear seat backrest and fold it for wards slightly (/ page 101).

# Pull the head restraint upwards as far as it will go.

92 Seats and stowing

# Push release knob1 in the direction of the arrow and pull out the head restraint.

Installing # Insert the head restraint such that the

notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel.

# Push the head restraint down until it engages.

# Fold the rear seat backrest back until it engages.

Configuring the seat settings

Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Seat Comfort

Adjusting the backrest contour in the lumbar region of the seat backrest (lumbar) # Select Lumbar. # Select the settingsZ for the desired seat. # Adjust the air cushions.

Adjusting the backrest side bolsters # Select Side Bolsters. # Adjust the air cushion for the desired seat.

Selecting the massage program for the front seats

Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Massage # Select Wave Massage or Pulsating Massage. # Start the program for the desired seat;. # To set the massage intensity: switch High

Intensity on or off .

Resetting seat settings

Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Seat Comfort # Select for the desired seat. # Confirm the prompt.

Switching seat heating on/off

& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat edly switching on the seat heating

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limi ted temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affec ted or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat

heating.

To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it is switched on repeatedly.

* NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heating is switched on

When the seat heating is switched on, over heating may occur due to objects or docu

Seats and stowing 93

ments placed on the seats, e.g. seat cush ions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface. # Make sure that no objects or docu

ments are on the seats when the seat heating is switched on.

Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.

# Press button1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched off.

% The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels after 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating switches off.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.

# Press button1 repeatedly until the desired blower setting has been reached. Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched off.

94 Seats and stowing

Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel mechanically

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi cle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi

cle is in motion.

# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas ten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil dren when adjusting the steering wheel

Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# To unlock: push release lever1 down as far as it will go.

# Adjust height2 and distance3 to the steering wheel.

# To lock: push release lever1 up as far as it will go.

# Check and make sure that the steering col umn is locked by moving the steering wheel.

Switching the steering wheel heating on/off

Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.

Seats and stowing 95

# Push the switch into position1 or2. If indicator lamp3 lights up, the steering wheel heating is switched on.

When you switch the ignition off, the steering wheel heating switches off.

Easy entry and exit feature Using the easy entry and exit feature

& WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process for the easy exit feature

You could lose control of the vehicle. # Always wait until the adjustment proc

ess is complete before pulling away.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the easy entry and exit feature

You and other vehicle occupants could become trapped. # Ensure that no-one has any body parts

in the range of movement of the seat.

If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat:

# Press the seat adjustment switch. The adjustment process will be stop ped.

You can stop the adjustment process by press ing one of the memory function position switches.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and exit feature

Children could become trapped if they acti vate the easy entry and exit feature, particu larly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take

the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

96 Seats and stowing

When the easy entry and exit feature is active, the driver's seat will move backwards and the backrest will be moved to a steeper position when: R You switch the ignition off with the driver's

door open. R You open the driver's door with the ignition

switched off.

% The driver's seat will then move backwards only if it is not already at the rear of the seat adjustment range. The seat backrest will then move forwards only if it is not already at the front of the backrest adjustment range.

The driver's seat will move back to the last drive position when: R You switch the ignition on with the driver's

door closed. R You close the driver's door with the ignition

switched on.

The last drive position will be saved when: R You switch the ignition off.

R You call up the seat settings via the memory function. R You save the seat settings via the memory

function.

Setting the easy entry and exit feature

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Automatic Seat Adjustment 5 Easy Entry/Exit # Activate or deactivate the function.

Memory function Function of the memory function

& WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving

If you use the memory function on the driv er's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made.

# Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is station ary.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when set ting the seat with the memory function

When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants particu larly children could become trapped. # During the adjustment process of the

memory function, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

# If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button or seat adjust ment switch immediately.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the memory function is activated by children

Children could become trapped if they acti vate the memory function, particularly when unattended.

Seats and stowing 97

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

You can use the memory function when the igni tion is switched off. Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function. You can save settings for the following systems: R Seat R Seat contour R Outside mirrors R Head-up Display

Operating the memory function

Storing

# Set the desired position for all systems. # Briefly press memory buttonV and then

press preset position4,T orU within three seconds.

# To call up: press and briefly hold one of pre set position buttons4,T orU. After releasing the button, all systems are moved into the stored position.

Stowage areas Notes on loading the vehicle

& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before

opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open.

& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip,

98 Seats and stowing

tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that

they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, lug

gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi tion, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets.

# Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk.

& WARNING Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is moving

The cup holder cannot secure containers while the vehicle is moving. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is moving, the container may be flung around and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occu pants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You

could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle. # Only use the cup holder when the vehi

cle is stationary. # Only use the cup holder for containers

of the right size. # Close the container, particularly if the

liquid is hot.

* NOTE Damage to the cup holder

When the rear armrest is folded back the cup holder could become damaged. # Only fold the rear armrest back when

the cup holder is closed.

* NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight

When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight. # Do not sit or support yourself on the

rear seat armrest.

Seats and stowing 99

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from hot cigarette lighter

You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the ciga rette lighter. In addition, flammable materials may ignite if: R you drop the hot cigarette lighter R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to

objects, for example

# Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.

# Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of burns from the tail pipe and tailpipe trims

The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact

with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around

the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area.

# Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.

The driving characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle: R Never exceed the permissible gross mass or

the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occupants). The values are speci fied on the vehicle identification plate on the vehicle's B-pillar. R The load must not protrude above the upper

edge of the seat backrests. R Always place the load behind unoccupied

seats if possible. R Secure the load using the tie-down eyes and

distribute the load evenly.

Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior

Overview of the front storage compartments

1 Storage space in the doors 2 Storage compartment in the armrest with a

multimedia and USB connection 3 Storage compartment in the front center

console with a USB port 4 Glove box

100 Seats and stowing

Through-loading feature in the rear bench seat (EASY-PACK Quickfold)

Folding the rear seat backrest forwards

& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back rest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be

pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo

compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest.

# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

If the seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, the lock verification indicator will be red.

Requirements: R To fold the center seat backrest forwards:

the center seat backrest has been unlocked.

You can fold the center and outer seat backrests forwards separately.

Vehicles with a memory function: If neces sary, when the seat backrest in the rear passenger compartment is folded forward, the front seat will move forwards slightly to avoid a collision. # If necessary, fully insert the head restraints

in the rear seat backrest.

The release handles are located beneath the rear shelf. # To fold the left and right seat backrests

forward: pull the right or left release handle 1 and fold the corresponding seat backrest forwards.

Seats and stowing 101

# To fold the center seat backrest for wards: pull release catch3 of seat back rest2 forwards.

# Fold seat backrest2 forwards. # If necessary, reset the driver's or front

passenger seat.

Folding back the rear seat backrest

* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat backrest

The seat belt could become trapped and thus damaged when the seat backrest is folded back. # Make sure that the seat belt is not trap

ped when folding back the seat back rest.

# Move the driver's or front passenger seat for wards, if necessary.

# Fold the corresponding seat backrest1 back until it engages. Left and right seat backrests: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indicator2 will be visible. Center seat backrest: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indicator3 will be visible.

102 Seats and stowing

Locking the release catch of the center rear seat backrest

Requirements: R The left and center seat backrests are

engaged and joined together.

You can lock the center seat backrest release catch if you want to secure the trunk against unauthorized access. The center seat backrest can then be folded forwards only together with the left seat backrest.

# Fold the center and left seat backrests for wards.

# To lock or unlock: slide catch1 up or down.

Overview of the tie-down eyes

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 98).

1 Tie-down eyes (vehicles with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat)

Seats and stowing 103

Attaching a roof luggage rack

& WARNING Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load

The vehicle center of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics alter. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. # Never exceed the maximum roof load

and adjust your driving style.

You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section.

* NOTE Vehicle damage from non- approved roof luggage racks

The vehicle could be damaged by roof lug gage racks that have not been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # Use only roof luggage racks tested and

approved for Mercedes-Benz.

# Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the sliding sunroof can be fully raised when the roof luggage rack is installed.

# Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the trunk lid can be fully opened when the roof luggage rack is installed.

# Position the load on the roof luggage rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion.

* NOTE Damage to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel due to non- approved roof luggage racks

The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel may be damaged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to open it when using a roof luggage rack not tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # When a roof luggage rack is installed,

open the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel only if this has been

tested and approved for Mercedes- Benz.

The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel may be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior.

104 Seats and stowing

* NOTE Damage to the covers

The covers may be damaged and scratched when being opened. # Do not use metallic or hard objects.

# Carefully fold covers1 upwards in the direction of the arrow.

# Secure the roof luggage rack to the fastening points beneath covers1.

# Comply with the installation instructions of the roof luggage rack manufacturer.

# Secure the load on the roof luggage rack.

Sockets Using the 12 V socket

Requirements: R Only devices up to a maximum of 180 W

(15 A) are permissible.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following 12 V sockets: R In the storage compartment in the front cen

ter console R In the trunk

Example: 12 V socket in the storage compartment in the front center console

# Fold up socket cap1. # Insert the plug of the device.

12 V socket in the storage compartment with cover: if you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the storage compartment open.

USB port in the rear passenger compartment

% Depending on the vehicle equipment, the design of the storage compartment and the number of USB ports in the rear passenger compartment center console may vary.

If the ignition is switched on you can charge a USB device, such as a mobile phone, at the USB ports using a suitable charging cable.

Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna Notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within.

Seats and stowing 105

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they can

not be thrown around in such situa tions.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets.

# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compart ment.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone storage compartment

Placing other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment could constitute a fire hazard.

# Apart from a mobile phone, do not place any other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment, especially those made of metal.

* NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone stor age compartment

If objects are placed in the mobile phone storage compartment, they may be damaged by electromagnetic fields. # Do not place credit cards, data storage

devices, ski passes or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone storage compart ment.

* NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids

If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged.

# Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment.

The following notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone must be observed: R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the

mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior antenna via the charging module. R The charging function and wireless connec

tion of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior antenna are only available if the igni tion is switched on. R Small mobile phones may not be able to be

charged in every position of the mobile phone storage compartment. R Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in

the mobile phone storage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior antenna. R The mobile phone may heat up during the

charging process. This may particularly depend on the applications (apps) currently open in the background.

106 Seats and stowing

R To ensure more efficient charging and con nection with the vehicle's exterior antenna, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone. Protective covers which are neces sary for wireless charging are excluded.

Wirelessly charging a mobile phone

Requirements: R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless

charging. A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benz- mobile.com

# Place the mobile phone as close to the cen ter of the marked surface on mat1 as pos sible with the display facing upwards. When a message is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. Malfunctions during the charging process are shown in the media display.

% The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water.

Stowage compartment without cover Make sure the mobile phone is properly stored and secured to prevent it from falling out while you are driving.

# To secure the mobile phone: swing lever 2 out.

Installing/removing the floor mats

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely

so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

# Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

Seats and stowing 107

Installing floor mats

# Slide the corresponding seat backwards and lay the floor mat in the footwell.

# Press studs1 onto holders2. # Adjust the corresponding seat.

Removing floor mats # Pull the floor mat off holders2.

# Remove the floor mat.

108 Seats and stowing

Exterior lighting Information about lighting systems and your responsibility

The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situation.

Light switch

Operating light switches

1 W Left-hand standing lamps 2 X Right-hand standing lamps 3 T Parking lamps and license plate lamp 4 Automatic driving lights (preferred light

switch position)

5 L Low beam/high beam 6 R Switches the rear fog lamp on or off

When low beam is activated, the T indicator lamp for the parking lamps will be deactivated and replaced by the L low-beam indicator lamp. # Always park your vehicle safely using suffi

cient lighting, in accordance with the rele vant legal stipulations.

* NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights

Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery. # Where possible, switch on the

right X or left W parking light.

If the battery is insufficiently charged, the stand ing lamps or parking lamps will be switched off automatically to facilitate the next engine start.

Light and visibility 109

The exterior lighting (except standing and park ing lamps) will switch off automatically when the driver's door is opened. R Observe the notes on surround lighting

(/ page 113).

Automatic driving lights function The parking lamps, low beam and daytime run ning lamps are switched on automatically depending on the ignition status and the ambi ent light.

& WARNING Risk of accident when the low beam is switched off in poor visibility

When the light switch is set to, the low beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray. # In such cases, turn the light switch to

L.

The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for vehicle lighting.

Switching the rear fog lights on or off

Requirements: R The light switch is in the L or posi

tion.

# Press the R button.

Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps.

Operating the combination switch for the lights

1 High beam 2 Turn signal light, right 3 High-beam flasher 4 Turn signal light, left

# Use the combination switch to activate the desired function.

110 Light and visibility

Switching on high beam # Turn the light switch to the L or

position. # Push the combination switch in the direction

of arrow1. When the high beam is activated, the L indicator lamp for low beam will be deactiva ted and replaced by the K indicator lamp for high beam.

Switching off high beam # Push the combination switch in the direction

of arrow1 or pull it in the direction of arrow 3.

High-beam flasher # Pull the combination switch in the direction

of arrow3.

Turn signal light # To indicate briefly: push the combination

switch briefly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow2 or4. The corresponding turn signal light will flash three times.

# To indicate permanently: push the combi nation switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow2 or4. Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist: R A turn signal indicator activated by the

driver may continue to operate for the duration of the lane change. R If the driver indicated directly beforehand

but a lane change was not immediately possible, the turn signal indicator may activate automatically.

Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights

# Press button 1. The hazard warning lights will switch on auto matically if: R The airbag has been deployed.

Light and visibility 111

Cornering light

Cornering light function

The cornering light improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the turning direc tion, enabling better visibility on tight curves, for example. It can be activated only when the low beam is switched on. The function is active in the following cases: R At speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) when

the turn signal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned

R At speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 43 mph (70 km/h) and when the steering wheel is turned

Roundabout and intersection function: the cornering light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current GPS position. It will remain active until after the vehicle has left the roundabout or the intersec tion.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Adaptive Highbeam Assist function

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes

trians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g.

cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed,

e.g. by a barrier

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the auto matic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the road and traffic

conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors

are obscured

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic condi tions.

112 Light and visibility

Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R High beam

At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): R If no other road users are detected, the high

beam will be switched on automatically.

The high beam will switch off automatically in the following cases: R At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) R If other road users are detected R If street lighting is sufficient

The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off

Switching on # Turn the light switch to the position. # Switch on the high beam using the combina

tion switch. If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the multifunction display.

Switching off # Switch off the high beam using the combina

tion switch.

Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time

Requirements: R The light switch is in the position.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Exterior Lighting Delay # Set the switch-off delay time.

When the vehicle engine is switched off, the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time.

Switching the surround lighting on/off

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Locator Lighting When Locator Lighting is active, the exterior lighting lights up for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the sur round lighting is deactivated and the automatic driving lights are activated. # Activate or deactivate the function.

Light and visibility 113

Interior lighting Adjusting the interior lighting

Front overhead control panel

1 p Front left reading lamp 2 | Automatic interior lighting control 3 c Front interior lighting 4 u Rear interior lighting 5 p Front right reading lamp

# To switch on/off: press button1 5 accordingly.

Control panel in the grab handle

1 p Rear reading lamp

# To switch on/off: press button1.

Adjusting the ambient lighting

Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Ambient Lighting

Setting the color # Select Color. # Set the desired color.

Adjusting the brightness # Select Brightness. # Adjust the brightness.

Activating the brightness for zones # Select Brightness. # Select Brightness Zones. # Activate or deactivate the function. or # Set the brightness for the desired zones.

Activating multi-color lighting # Select Color. # Select Multi-color. # Select a color combination.

Activating multi-color animation # Select Color. # Select Multi-color Animation.

The chosen color combination will change at predefined intervals.

114 Light and visibility

Activating welcome lighting # Select Color. # Select Welcome.

When the vehicle is unlocked, a special ambi ent lighting sequence will run.

Activating dependency on air conditioning settings # Select Color. # Select Climate.

If changes are made to the temperature set ting in the vehicle, the color of the ambient lighting will change briefly.

Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay time on/off

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior Lighting Delay # Switch the switch-off delay time on or off.

When this function is active, the interior light ing lights up for a short time after the vehicle is locked.

Windshield wiper and windshield washer system Switching the windshield wipers on/off

1 g Windshield wipers off 2 Automatic wiping, normal 3 Automatic wiping, frequent

4 Continuous wiping, slow 5 Continuous wiping, fast

# Turn the combination switch to the corre sponding position1 -5.

# Single wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow1. R Single wipe R Wipes with washer fluid

Replacing the windshield wiper blades

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced

If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers

and the ignition before changing the wiper blades.

Light and visibility 115

Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position # Switch the ignition on and then off again

immediately. # Within around 15 seconds, press and hold

the button on the combination switch for approximately three seconds (/ page 115). The wiper arms will move into the replace ment position.

Removing the wiper blades # Fold the wiper arms away from the wind

shield.

# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow1 as far as it will go.

# Slide catch2 in the direction of arrow3 until it engages in the removal position.

# Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow4.

Installing the wiper blades

# Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow1.

# Slide catch2 in the direction of arrow3 until it engages in the locking position.

# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor rectly.

116 Light and visibility

# Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind shield.

# Switch on the ignition. # Press the button on the combination

switch (/ page 115). The wiper arms will return to the original position.

# Switch the ignition off.

Maintenance display

# Remove protective film1 from the mainte nance display on the tip of the newly instal led wiper blades.

When the color of the maintenance display changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced.

% The duration until the color changes varies depending on the usage conditions.

Mirrors Operating the outside mirrors

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi cle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head

restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi

cle is in motion.

# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas ten your seat belt.

Light and visibility 117

& WARNING Risk of accident due to mis judgment of distance when using the front-passenger mirror

The outside mirror on the front passenger side reflects objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear. # Therefore, always look over your shoul

der in order to ensure that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the road users driving behind you.

# To fold in or out: briefly press button2. # To set: press button1 or3 to select the

outside mirror to be adjusted. # Use button4 to adjust the position of the

mirror glass.

% If the battery has been disconnected or com pletely discharged, you will have to reset the

outside mirrors. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly.

# To reset: briefly press button2. An outside mirror that has been pushed out of position can be engaged in position again as fol lows: # Vehicles without electrically folding out

side mirrors: Manually move the outside mirror into the correct position.

# Vehicles with electrically folding outside mirrors: Press and hold button2. The mirror will audibly click into place. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position.

Automatic anti-glare mirrors function

& WARNING Risk of acid burns and poi soning due to the anti-glare mirror elec trolyte

Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks.

118 Light and visibility

The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into con tact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. # If you come into contact with electro

lyte, observe the following: R Immediately rinse the electrolyte

from your skin with water and seek medical attention. R If electrolyte comes into contact

with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. R If the electrolyte is swallowed,

immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. R Immediately change out of clothing

which has been contaminated with electrolyte. R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek

medical attention immediately.

The inside rearview mirror and the outside mir ror on the driver's side will automatically go into anti-glare mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rearview mirror.

System limits The system will not go into anti-glare mode if: R The engine is switched off. R Reverse gear is engaged. R The interior lighting is switched on.

Front-passenger outside mirror parking posi tion function

The parking position makes parking easier. The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger's side when: R The parking position is stored (/ page 120). R The front-passenger mirror is selected. R Reverse gear is engaged.

The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position when: R You shift the transmission to another trans

mission position. R You are traveling at a speed greater than

9 mph (15 km/h). R You press the button for the outside mirror

on the driver's side.

Light and visibility 119

Storing the parking position of the front- passenger outside mirror using reverse gear

Storing

# Press button1 to select the front- passenger outside mirror.

# Engage reverse gear. # Move the front-passenger outside mirror into

the desired parking position using button2.

Calling up # Press button1 to select the front-

passenger outside mirror. # Engage reverse gear.

The front-passenger outside mirror will move into the stored parking position.

Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Switch Automatic Folding on or off.

120 Light and visibility

Overview of climate control systems Notes on climate control

In order for the air conditioning system, monitor ing of the pollution level and air filtration to func tion correctly, an interior air filter must always be used. Make sure that the filter is installed correctly. Use filters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have main tenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Overview of the control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

The indicator lamps in the,,, g, and0 buttons indicate that the corresponding function is activated.

1 w Sets the temperature on the driver's side

2 _ Sets the air distribution 3H Sets the airflow or switches off climate

control 4 Sets climate control to automatic

(/ page 122) 5 Defrosts the windshield 6 Switches the rear window heater

on/off 7 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/

off(/ page 123) 8 Switches the A/C function on/

off(/ page 121)

Switches residual heat on/off (/ page 123) 90 Activates/deactivates synchroniza

tion(/ page 122) A w Sets the temperature on the front

passenger side

Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/off

# To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or higher using theH button.

# To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using theH button.

If climate control is switched off, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch climate control off only briefly.

Switching the A/C function on or off via the control panel

The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air. # Press the/ button.

Climate control 121

Switch off the A/C function only briefly; other wise, the windows may fog up more quickly. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not a sign that there is a malfunction.

Calling up the air conditioning menu

Calling up the air conditioning menu using the multimedia system # Select one of the temperature displays at the

lower edge of the media display.

Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the multimedia system

The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air. # Call up the air-conditioning menu

(/ page 122). # Select First Row of Seats. # Select A/C.

Setting climate control to automatic mode

In automatic mode, the set temperature is con trolled and maintained at a constant level by the air supply. # Press the button. # To switch to manual mode: press the_

or button.

In automatic mode, you can choose between five different air quantities using theH button. Automatic mode is retained.

Setting the air distribution

# Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 122).

# Select a row of seats. # To set the air distribution: select,

P orO. # Set the airflow. % Several air distribution options can be selec

ted at the same time, for example to set the climate control for the windshield and the footwells simultaneously.

The climate control for the windshield can only be selected for the first seat row.

Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronization function via the control panel

Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The temperature and air distribution settings for the driver's side will be adopted automatically for the front passenger side. # Press the0 button.

The synchronization function will be deactivated if the settings for one of the other climate zones are changed.

Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronization function via the multimedia system

Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The driver's settings for temperature, air quantity and air distribution are adopted automatically for all climate zones.

122 Climate control

# Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 122).

# Select First Row of Seats. # Select SYNC.

Removing condensation from the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside # Press the button. # If the windows continue to fog up: press the

button.

Windows fogged up on the outside # Switch on the windshield wipers. # Press the button.

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off

# Press theg button. The interior air will be recirculated.

Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to fresh air mode after some time.

% If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly.

Switching the residual heat on/off (Canada)

Requirements: R The vehicle is parked.

% Only vehicles with a diesel engine can use residual heat.

It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilat ing the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes, depending on the temperature set. # To activate: press the button.

Residual heat will be switched off automatically.

Air vents

Adjusting the front air vents

& WARNING Risk of burns and frostbite due to being too close to the air vents

Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. # Make sure that all vehicle occupants

always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents.

# If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

To guarantee the flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the following: R Always keep the vents and vent grilles in the

vehicle interior free. R Keep the air inlet free of residue build-up

(/ page 256).

Climate control 123

# To open or close: hold air vent1 in the center and turn it to the left (open) or right (closed) as far as it will go.

# To set the airflow direction: hold air vent1 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right.

Adjusting the rear air vents

# To open or close: hold air vent1 in the center and turn it to the left or right as far as it will go.

# To set the airflow direction: hold air vent1 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right.

124 Climate control

Driving Notes on Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes on the following additional topics in the Supplement, as you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers: R Emotion Start R AMG exhaust system R RACE START R DRIFT MODE R AMG adaptive sport suspension system R AMG steering wheel buttons

Switching on the power supply or ignition

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf

fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recog

nized. R Vehicles with automatic transmission:

The brake pedal is not depressed.

Driving and parking 125

# To switch on the power supply: press but ton1 once. You can activate the windshield wipers, for example.

The power supply is switched off again if the fol lowing conditions are met: R You open the driver's door. R You press button1 twice more.

# To switch on the ignition: press button1 twice. The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up.

The ignition is switched off again if one of the following conditions is met: R Vehicles with automatic transmission:

You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the transmission is in posi tionj or the electric parking brake is applied. R You press button1 once.

Starting the vehicle

Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but ton

& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.

# Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation.

& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable material in the engine compartment or the exhaust system

Flammable materials may ignite. # Therefore, check regularly that there

are no flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system.

Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recog

nized.

# Shift the transmission to positionj ori. # Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 once.

# If the vehicle does not start: switch off non- essential consumers and press button1 once.

126 Driving and parking

# If the vehicle still does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual display message also appears in the multifunction display: start the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space (emergency operation mode) (/ page 127).

% You can switch off the engine while driving by pressing button1 for about three sec onds or by pressing button1 three times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes under "Driving tips" (/ page 129).

Starting the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space (emergency operation mode) If the vehicle does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual message appears in the multifunction display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode.

Marked space (example with cup holder without cover)

# Open the cover of marked space2 if neces sary.

# Make sure that marked space2 is empty. # Remove SmartKey1 from the key ring.

# Place SmartKey1 in marked space2 on the symbol3. The vehicle will start after a short time. If you remove SmartKey1 from marked space2 the engine continues running. For further engine starts however, SmartKey1 must be located in marked space2 on sym bol3 during the entire journey.

# Have SmartKey1checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the vehicle does not start: # Place SmartKey1 in marked space2 and

leave it there. # Depress the brake pedal and start the vehi

cle using the start/stop button. % You can also switch on the power supply or

the ignition with the start/stop button.

Driving and parking 127

Starting the vehicle via Remote Online serv ices

Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before commencing your journey Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your

vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where

your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is sufficiently full. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged.

Charging the starter battery before starting the journey If the vehicle battery is discharged, you can receive a message on your smartphone. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically switched off after ten minutes.

Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your

vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where

your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is sufficiently full.

Starting the vehicle (Remote Online)

& WARNING Risk of crushing or entrap ment due to unintentional starting of the engine

Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work. # Always secure the engine against unin

tentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work.

Requirements: R Park positionj is selected. R The anti-theft alarm system is not activated. R The panic alarm is not activated.

R The hazard warning light system is switched off. R The hood is closed. R The doors are closed and locked. R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed.

# Start the vehicle using the smartphone. After every engine start, the engine runs for ten minutes.

You can carry out a maximum of two consecu tive starting attempts. You must start the vehicle once with the SmartKey before trying to start the engine again with the smartphone. you can stop the vehicle again at any time. % Further information can be found in the

smartphone app.

Securing the engine against starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work: # Switch on the hazard warning light system. or # Unlock the doors. or

128 Driving and parking

# Open a side window or the sliding sunroof.

Breaking-in notes

To preserve the engine during the first 1000 miles (1500 km): R Drive at varying road speeds and engine

speeds. R Do not drive at speeds greater than 85 mph

(140 km/h). R Drive the vehicle in drive programA

or;. R Shift to the next highest gear at the very lat

est when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the tachometer. R Do not shift down a gear manually in order to

brake. R Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at

full throttle. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: Do

not depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown).

R Only increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed after 1000 miles (1500 km).

This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced. Please also observe the following breaking-in notes: R In certain driving and driving safety systems,

the sensors adjust automatically while a cer tain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full sys tem effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process. R Brakepads, brake discs and tires that are

either new or have been replaced only ach ieve optimum braking effect and grip after several hundred kilometers of driving. Com pensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

Notes on driving

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely

so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

# Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

Driving and parking 129

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect footwear

Incorrect footwear includes, for example: R Shoes with platform soles R Shoes with high heels R Slippers

# Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the pedals safely.

& WARNING Risk of accident if the ignition is switched off while driving

If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example. # Do not switch off the ignition while driv

ing.

& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present,

the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation.

& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces

If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shift down on slippery road sur

faces to increase the engine braking effect.

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi sonous exhaust gases

If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi cle. This is the case when the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, for example. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around

the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater are run ning.

# Open a window on the side of the vehi cle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to being under the influence of alco hol and drugs while driving

Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg ment.

130 Driving and parking

The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci dent are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. # Do not drink or take drugs and drive or

allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating

If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may over heat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system may even fail. # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. # Do not depress the brake pedal and the

accelerator pedal at the same time while driving.

* NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds

The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range. # Do not drive with the engine in the over

revving range.

* NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by continuously depressing the brake pedal

# Do not depress the brake pedal contin uously whilst driving.

# To use the braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time.

* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away

# Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi ately.

# Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature.

* NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel

The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata lytic converter. # Only depress the accelerator pedal

slightly. # Have the cause rectified immediately at

a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on driving on salt-treated roads The braking effect is limited on salt-treated roads. Therefore, observe the following notes: R Due to salt build-up on the brake discs and

brakepads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in braking only on one side R Maintain a much greater safe distance to the

vehicle in front

Driving and parking 131

To remove salt build-up: R Brake occasionally while paying attention to

the traffic conditions R Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end

of the journey and when starting the next journey

Notes on hydroplaning Hydroplaning can take place once a certain amount of water has accumulated on the road surface. Observe the following notes during heavy precip itation or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur: R Reduce speed R Avoid tire ruts R Avoid sudden steering movements R Brake carefully

% Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tires (/ page 287).

Notes on driving through water on the road surface Water which has entered into the vehicle can damage the engine, electrics and transmission. Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage. Observe the following if you must drive through water: R The water, when calm, may only reach the

lower edge of the vehicle body. R Drive at a maximum speed of 6 mph

(10 km/h); water can otherwise enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment. R Vehicles traveling in front, or oncoming vehi

cles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible depth of the water.

The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored.

ECO start/stop function

Operation of the ECO start/stop function % The ECO start/stop function is not available

in all drive programs, depending on the engine. Observe the status display in the multifunction display for this.

If all vehicle-related conditions for an automatic engine stop are met, the engine is switched off automatically: R Vehicles with automatic transmission:

You brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans mission positionh ori. R You activate the HOLD function or engage

transmission positionj.

% If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibitor, e.g. a stop sign, the engine will not stop. If you activate the HOLD function or engage the park positionj, the engine can be switched off in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor.

132 Driving and parking

% In transmission positionk, the engine is not switched off automatically even when the HOLD function is switched on.

The engine is restarted automatically if: R Vehicles with automatic transmission:

You shift into transmission positionh or k. R You depress the accelerator pedal. R An automatic engine start is required by the

vehicle.

Status display in the multifunction display: R The symbol (green) appears when the

vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function. R The symbol (yellow) appears when the

vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle condi tions for an engine stop have been met. R Neither the nor symbol appears

when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelli gent stop inhibitor was detected, e.g. a stop sign.

R Thes symbol appears: the ECO start/ stop function is deactivated or there is a mal function.

If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/ stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn ing tone sounds and the engine is not restarted. In addition, the Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exitingdisplay message appears in the multifunction display. If you do not switch off the ignition, the ignition is auto matically switched off after three minutes.

Deactivating or activating the ECO start/ stop function

# Press button1. A display appears in the instrument cluster when switching the ECO start/stop function off/on.

% A continuous display appears in the instrument cluster while the ECO start/stop function is deactivated.

Driving and parking 133

ECO display function

The ECO display summarizes your driving char acteristics from the start of the journey to its completion and assists you in achieving the most economical driving style. You can influence consumption by doing the fol lowing: R Drive with particular care R Vehicles with automatic transmission:

driving in drive program;. R Follow the gearshift recommendations

The lettering in the segment will light up brightly, the outer edge will light up and the segment will fill up when the following driving style is adop ted: R 1 Steady speed R 2 Gentle deceleration and rolling R 3 Moderate acceleration

The lettering in the segment will be gray, the outer edge will be dark and the segment will empty when the following driving style is adop ted: R 1 Fluctuations in speed R 2 Heavy braking R 3 Sporty acceleration

The ECO display will show you when you have driven economically: R The three segments will fill up completely at

the same time R The edges around all three segments will

light up

The additional range achieved as a result of your driving style in comparison with a driver with a very sporty driving style will be shown in the center of display4. The range displayed does not indicate a fixed reduction in consumption.

DYNAMIC SELECT switch Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

% Depending on the engine and equipment, the vehicle has different drive programs.

Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change between the following drive programs. The drive program selected appears in the multi function display of the on-board computer. = Individual R Individual settings

134 Driving and parking

C Sport R Continues to offer stability but with a sporty

setup R Allows the sporty driver a more active driving

style R Only suitable for good road conditions, a dry

road surface and a clear stretch of road

A Comfort R Comfortable and economical driving R Balance between traction and stability R Recommended for all road conditions

; Eco R Only available for vehicles with automatic

transmission R Particularly economical driving R Balance between traction and stability R Recommended for all road conditions

Depending on the drive program, the following systems change their characteristics: R Drive:

- Engine and transmission management - Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R ESP

R Vehicles with adaptive damping adjust ment: suspension R Electric power steering

Selecting the drive program

% Depending on the equipment, the vehicle is equipped with either a switch or a button.

# Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch1 forwards or backwards. The drive program selected appears in the multifunction display.

Driving and parking 135

# Press DYNAMIC SELECT button2. The DYNAMIC SELECT menu appears in the multifunction display.

# Press DYNAMIC SELECT button2 again. The chosen drive program appears.

Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT (multimedia system)

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 DYNAMIC SELECT

Setting drive program I # Select Individual Configuration. # Select and set a category.

Switching the restoration display on or off # Switch Request at Start on or off.

Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO start/stop function was deactivated, an addi tional prompt appears asking if the function should remain deactivated. % The prompt appears only if the previously

active settings deviate from the standard settings.

Function off: the next time the vehicle is star ted theA drive program is set automatically.

The ECO start/stop function is activated auto matically. % This function must be activated for each user

profile separately. Only when this function is activated will the drive program and Eco start/stop setting for the previous journey be saved for the respective user profile.

Displaying vehicle data

Multimedia system: 4 5 Info # Select Vehicle.

The vehicle data is displayed.

Displaying engine data

Multimedia system: 4 5 Info # Select Engine.

The engine data is displayed.

136 Driving and parking

% The actual (maximum) values that can be achieved for engine output and engine tor que may deviate from the certified values within the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-specific guidelines). Factors that can influence this are, for exam ple: R Sea level R Fuel grade R Outside temperature R Operating temperature of the engine

% The values displayed serve only as orienta tion. The values for engine output and engine torque shown in the media display may deviate from the actual values.

Calling up the consumption indicator

Multimedia system: 4 5 Info # Select Consumption.

The current and average consumption is dis played.

Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever

Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect gearshifting

If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission posi tionh ork, the vehicle may accelerate sharply. # If you engage the transmission position

h ork when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf

fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

Driving and parking 137

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position is displayed in the multifunction display.

j Park position k Reverse gear

i Neutral h Drive position

Engaging reverse gear R # Depress the brake pedal and push the

DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first point of resistance.

Engaging neutral N # Depress the brake pedal and push the

DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance.

% To shift into neutrali with the ignition on, push the selector lever up or down for sev eral seconds to the first point of resistance.

Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away.

Proceed as follows if you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutrali, even if the ignition is switched off or the driver's door is opened: # Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral

i when the vehicle is at a standstill.

# Release the brake pedal. # Switch the ignition off. % If you then exit the vehicle leaving the

SmartKey in the vehicle, the automatic trans mission remains in neutrali.

Engaging park position P # Observe the notes on parking the vehicle

(/ page 144). # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle is

at a standstill. # When the vehicle is at a standstill, press but

tonj. When the transmission position display showsj, the park position is engaged. If no transmission position displayj appears, secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.

% Depending on the situation, it may take a short time untilj is engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission position display.

138 Driving and parking

Park positionj is engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met: R You switch off the ignition when the vehicle

is stationary and the transmission position is h ork. R You open the driver's door when the vehicle

is at a standstill or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission position ish or k.

% To maneuver with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while at a standstill and engage transmission positionh ork again.

% At very low outside temperatures below approx. -4F (-20C), you may not be able to shift the transmission fromj to another transmission position when the engine is switched off. If this is the case, only change the transmission position while the engine is running.

Engaging drive position D # Depress the brake pedal and push the

DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.

When the automatic transmission is in transmis sion positionh, it shifts the gears automati cally. This depends, among other things, on the following factors: R The selected drive program R The position of the accelerator pedal R The driving speed

Problems with the transmission

The transmission has a faulty gear shift Possible cause: R The transmission is losing oil.

# Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

The acceleration characteristics get worse, and the transmission no longer shifts. Possible cause: R The transmission is in emergency operation

mode.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traf fic conditions.

# Shift the transmission to positionj. # Switch off the engine. # Wait at least ten seconds. # Try to start the engine again. # Shift the transmission to positionh. # Have the transmission checked at a qualified

specialist workshop immediately.

Driving and parking 139

Manual gearshifting

When the automatic transmission is shifted to positionh, you can manually shift it with the steering wheel gearshift paddle. If permitted, the automatic transmission shifts to a higher or lower gear depending on the steering wheel gearshift paddle being pulled. You have two options to manually shift the auto matic transmission: R Temporary setting R Permanent setting

The gears shift automatically when manual gear shifting is deactivated.

Temporary setting: # To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift

paddle1 or2. Manual gearshifting is activated for a short time. The transmission position display showsp and the current gear.

% How long the manual gearshifting stays acti vated is dependent on various factors. Manual gearshifting can be automatically deactivated in the following cases: R Changing the drive program R Restarting the vehicle R When the transmission positionh is

engaged again R Driving style

# To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle2.

# To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle1. If you pull and hold the steering wheel gear shift paddle1, the transmission shifts to the lowest possible gear.

# To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle2 and hold it in place. The transmission position display showsh.

Permanent setting: # Change to drive program=(/ page 135). # Select drive settingp (/ page 136).

Gearshift recommendation

The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style.

140 Driving and parking

# If gearshift recommendation1 appears next to the transmission position display, shift to the recommended gear.

Using kickdown

# Maximum acceleration: depress the accel erator pedal beyond the pressure point.

To protect against engine overrev, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when maximum engine speed has been reached.

Glide mode function

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

With an anticipatory driving style, glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption.

Glide mode is characterized by the following: R The combustion engine is disconnected from

the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral. R The transmission position displayh is

shown in green.

Glide mode is activated if the following condi tions are met: R Drive program; is selected. R The speed is within a suitable range. R The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep

uphill or downhill inclines or tight curves. R you do not depress the accelerator or brake

pedal (except for light brake applications).

% Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the drive program=.

Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met. Vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: when Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active, the glide mode function is not available.

Glide mode can also be prevented by the follow ing parameters: R Incline R Downhill gradient R Temperature R Height R Speed R Operating status of the engine R Traffic situation

% Glide mode can be ended by pressing a steering wheel gearshift paddle (/ page 140).

Function of the 4MATIC 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insufficient traction. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor over ride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take

Driving and parking 141

account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible espe cially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. % In wintry road conditions, the maximum

effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary.

Refueling Refueling the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel

Fuels are highly flammable. # Fire, open flames, smoking and creation

of sparks must be avoided. # Switch off the ignition and, if available,

the stationary heater, before and while refueling the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels

Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into

contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during

the refueling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with

soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your

eyes, immediately rinse them thor oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.

# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten tion immediately. Do not induce vomit ing.

# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.

& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge

Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapor. # Before you open the fuel filler cap or

take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body.

# To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process.

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Vehicles with a gasoline engine: Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur gasoline.

This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel.

142 Driving and parking

Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by

volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by

volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal

If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi cles with a gasoline engine

If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise

fuel can enter the engine.

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Have the fuel tank and fuel lines

drained completely.

* NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused by overfilled fuel tanks

# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

If you have added too much fuel because of a defective filling pump, for instance: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle

# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

Requirements: R The vehicle is unlocked.

% Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again.

Observe the notes on operating fluids and fuel. Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number specified in the information label in the fuel filler flap. Otherwise, engine output can be reduced and fuel consumption increased.

Driving and parking 143

1 Fuel filler flap 2 Bracket for fuel filler cap 3 Tire pressure table 4 Fuel type 5 QR code for rescue card

# Press on the back area of fuel filler flap1. # Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and

remove it.

# Insert the fuel filler cap from above into bracket2.

# Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel.

# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

# Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly.

# Close fuel filler flap1.

Parking Parking the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insufficiently secured vehi cle rolling away

If the vehicle is not securely parked suffi ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient. # On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the

front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the curb if it starts moving.

# Apply the parking brake. # Switch the transmission to positionj.

& WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts

Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. # Park the vehicle so that no flammable

material can come into contact with hot vehicle components.

# In particular, do not park on dry grass land or harvested grain fields.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users.

144 Driving and parking

R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away

# Always secure the vehicle against roll ing away.

# Bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing the brake pedal.

# On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the curb if it starts moving.

# Apply the electric parking brake. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:

Engage transmission positionj in a station

ary vehicle with the brake pedal applied (/ page 138).

# Switch off the engine and the ignition by pressing button1.

# Release the service brake slowly. # Get out of the vehicle and lock it. % When you park the vehicle, you can still

operate the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed.

Garage door opener

Programming buttons for the garage door opener

& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.

Driving and parking 145

# Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation.

& WARNING Risk of injury when opening or closing a door with the garage door opener

When you operate or program the door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the door may become trapped or be struck by the door. # Always make sure that nobody is within

the range of movement of the door.

Only operate the following doors using the garage door opener: R Doors with a safety stop and reversing fea

ture R Doors which conform to the current U.S.

safety standards

Requirements: R The vehicle has been parked outside the

garage or outside the range of movement of the door. R The engine is switched off. R The ignition is switched on.

% The garage door opener function is always available when the ignition is switched on.

# Check if the transmitter frequency of the remote control has the frequency range of 280 to 868 MHz. Radio equipment approval number: R NZLMUAHL5 (USA) R 4112A-MUAHL5 (Canada)

# Press and hold button1,2 or3 that you wish to program. Indicator lamp4 flashes yellow.

% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi cator lamp flashes yellow.

# Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp4 continues to flash yellow.

# Point remote control5 from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) towards button 1,2 or3.

# Press and hold button6 of remote control 5 until one of the following signals appears: R Indicator lamp4 lights up green contin

uously. Programming is complete. R Indicator lamp4 flashes green. Pro

gramming was successful. Additionally,

146 Driving and parking

synchronization of the rolling code with the door system must also be carried out.

# If indicator lamp4 does not light up or flash green: repeat the procedure.

# Release all of the buttons. % The remote control for the door drive is not

included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener.

Synchronizing the rolling code

Requirements: R The door system uses a rolling code. R The vehicle must be within range of the

garage door or door drive. R The vehicle as well as persons and objects

are located outside the range of movement of the door.

# Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds.

# Press previously programmed button1,2 or3 repeatedly until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is com pleted.

% Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive.

Troubleshooting when programming the remote control # Check if the transmitter frequency of remote

control5 is supported. # Replace the batteries in remote control5. # Hold remote control5 at various angles

from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

# Hold remote control5 at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rear view mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

# On remote controls that transmit only for a limited period, press button6 on remote control5 again before transmission ends.

# Align the antenna line of the door opener unit with the remote control.

% Support and additional information on pro gramming: R On the toll free HomeLink Hotline on

1-800-355-3515 R On the Internet at https://

www.homelink.com/mercedes

Opening or closing the garage door

Requirements: R The corresponding button is programmed to

operate the door.

# Press and hold buttons1,2 or3 until the door opens or closes.

# If indicator lamp4 flashes yellow after approximately 20 seconds: press and hold the previously pressed button again until the door opens or closes.

Driving and parking 147

Clearing the garage door opener memory # Press and hold buttons1 and3.

Indicator lamp4 lights up yellow. # If indicator lamp4 flashes green: release

buttons1 and3. The entire memory has been deleted.

Electric parking brake

Function of the electric parking brake (apply ing automatically)

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other

persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf

fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.

The electric parking brake is applied if the trans mission is in positionj and one of the follow ing conditions is fulfilled: R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the

seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.

% To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake (/ page 149).

In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also applied: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing

the vehicle to a standstill. R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta

tionary. R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle

stationary.

This is the case if one of the following conditions is also fulfilled: R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the

seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. R There is a system malfunction. R The power supply is insufficient. R The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.

When the electric parking brake is applied, the redF (USA) or! (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

148 Driving and parking

The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

Electric parking brake function (releasing automatically) The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are fulfilled: R The driver's door is closed. R The engine is running. R Vehicles with automatic transmission:

The transmission is in positionh ork and you depress the accelerator pedal or you shift from transmission positionj toh or k when on level ground with the driver's door closed. R If the transmission is in positionk, the

trunk lid must be closed. R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat

belt buckle of the driver's seat. Vehicles with automatic transmission: if the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, the following conditions must be fulfilled:

- You shift from transmission positionj. - You have previously driven at speeds

greater than 2 mph (3 km/h).

When the electric parking brake is released, the redF (USA) or! (Canada) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually

Applying

# Push handle1. The redF (USA) or! (Canada) indica tor lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

Driving and parking 149

% The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the indicator lamp is lit continu ously.

Releasing # Switch on the ignition. # Pull handle1.

The redF (USA) or! (Canada) indica tor lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Emergency braking # Press and hold handle1.

As long as the vehicle is driving, the Please Release Parking Brake message is displayed and the red! indicator lamp flashes. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The redF (USA) or! (Can ada) indicator lamp lights up in the instru ment cluster.

Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle

If a collision is detected when the tow-away alarm is armed on a locked vehicle, you will receive a notification in the multimedia system when you switch on the ignition. You will receive information about the following points: R The area of the vehicle that may have been

damaged. R The force of the impact.

The following situations can lead to inadvertent activation: R The parked vehicle is moved, e.g. in a two-

story garage.

% Deactivate the tow-away alarm in order to prevent inadvertent activation. If you deacti vate the tow-away alarm, collision detection will also be deactivated.

% If the battery is severely discharged, the function for detecting a collision on a parked

vehicle is automatically deactivated to facili tate the next engine start.

System limits Detection may be restricted in the following sit uations: R The vehicle is damaged without impact, e.g.

if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is damaged by a SmartKey R An impact occurs at low speed R The electric parking brake is not applied

Notes on parking the vehicle for an extended period

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, it may suffer damage through disuse. The 12 V battery may also be impaired or dam aged by heavy discharging. Vehicles with automatic transmission: Do not disconnect the 12 V battery even if the vehicle is left idle for a lengthy period. % Further information can be obtained at a

qualified specialist workshop.

150 Driving and parking

Standby mode (extension of the starter bat tery's period out of use)

Standby mode function % This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimised during extended periods of non-oper ation. Standby mode is characterised by the following: R The starter battery is preserved. R The maximum non-operational time appears

in the media display. R The connection to online services is interrup

ted. R The ATA (anti-theft alarm system) is not avail

able. R The interior motion sensor and tow-away

alarm functions are not available. R The function for detecting collisions on a

parked vehicle is not available.

If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system: R The engine is switched off. R The ignition is switched on.

Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-opera tional time may cause inconvenience, i.e. it can not be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the engine. The starter battery must be charged first in the following situations: R The vehicle's non-operational time must be

extended. R The Battery Charge Insufficient for Standby

Mode message appears in the media display.

% Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched on.

Activating/deactivating standby mode (park ing the vehicle for an extended period)

Requirements: R The engine is switched off.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Standby Mode. # Select Yes.

Driving and driving safety systems Driving systems and your responsibility

Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and maneu vering the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems. Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always

Driving and parking 151

take into account road, weather or traffic condi tions.

Information on vehicle sensors and cameras

Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle.

% The radar sensors are integrated behind the bumpers and/or behind the Mercedes star.

1 Cameras in the outside mirrors 2 Multifunction camera 3 Front camera 4 Ultrasonic sensors 5 Rear view camera

& WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted detection performance of vehi cle sensors and cameras

If the area around vehicle sensors or cam eras is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. There is a risk of an accident. # Keep the area around vehicle sensors

or cameras clear of any obstructions and clean.

# Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.

Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush (/ page 261). The sensors and cameras may not be covered and the detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional license plate brackets, advertisements, stickers, foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in the detection range of the sensors and cameras. Make sure that there are no overhanging loads protruding into the detection range. If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator grille, or after an impact, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the windshield and rear window repaired at a qualified specialist work shop.

Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems

R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (/ page 153) R BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 153)

152 Driving and parking

R ESP (Electronic Stability Program) (/ page 154) R ESP Crosswind Assist (/ page 155) R EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)

(/ page 155) R STEER CONTROL (/ page 156) R HOLD function (/ page 156) R Hill Start Assist (/ page 157) R Start-off assist (/ page 157) R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 158) R Cruise control (/ page 160) R Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 178) R Suspension with adaptive damping adjust

ment (/ page 184)

Driving Assistance package The following functions are part of the Driving Assistance Package. Certain functions are only available in some countries. Some functions are also available without the Driving Assistance Package, albeit with restricted functionality.

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 162) R Active Speed Limit Assist (country-depend

ent) (/ page 166) R Route-based speed adaptation (country-

dependent) (/ page 167) R Active Brake Assist (/ page 173) R Active Steering Assist (country-dependent)

(/ page 168) R Active Emergency Stop Assist (country-

dependent) (/ page 170) R Active Lane Change Assist (country-depend

ent) (/ page 171) R Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist

with exit warning (/ page 180) R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 182)

Parking Package R Rear view camera (/ page 185) R Surround view camera (/ page 187) R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 189) R Active Parking Assist (/ page 194)

Function of ABS

The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure in critical driving situations: R During braking, e.g. at full brake application

or insufficient tire traction, the wheels are prevented from locking. R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving.

Function of BAS

The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated: R BAS automatically boosts the brake pres

sure. R BAS can shorten the braking distance.

Driving and parking 153

R ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

Functions of ESP (Electronic Stability Pro gram)

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is deactivated

If you deactivate ESP, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. # ESP should only be deactivated in the

following situations.

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

ESP can monitor and improve driving stability and traction in the following situations, within physical limits: R When pulling away on wet or slippery road. R When braking.

If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP can stabilize the vehicle by intervening in the following ways: R One or more wheels are braked. R The engine output is adapted according to

the situation.

ESP is deactivated if the ESP OFF warn ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster.

Observe the following points when ESP is deac tivated: R Driving stability will no longer be improved. R The drive wheels could spin. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.

% When ESP is deactivated, you are still assis ted by ESP when braking.

If the ESP warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster, one or several wheels has reached its grip limit: R Adapt the driving style to suit the prevailing

road and weather conditions. R Do not deactivate ESP under any circum

stances. R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as

is necessary.

It may be best to deactivate ESP in the follow ing situations: R When using snow chains. R In deep snow. R On sand or gravel.

% Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction.

If the ESP warning lamp lights up continu ously, ESP is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the following information: R Warning and indicator lamps (/ page 379) R Display messages (/ page 332)

154 Driving and parking

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery road. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways: R The drive wheels are braked individually if

they spin. R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel

or wheels with traction.

Influence of drive programs on ESP

The drive programs enable ESP to adapt to dif ferent weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the selected drive program, the appropriate ESP mode will be activated. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (/ page 135).

Function of ESP Crosswind Assist

ESP Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehi cle in the lane: R ESP Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle

speeds between approx. 47 mph (75 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly. R The vehicle is stabilized by means of individ

ual brake application on one side.

Activating/deactivating ESP (Electronic Sta bility Program)

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access % ESP can only be activated/deactivated

using quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP can otherwise be found in the Assistance menu.

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

# Select ESP. # Select On or Off.

ESP is deactivated if the ESP OFF warn ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster. Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster.

Function of EBD

Electronic Breakforce Distribution (EBD) is char acterized by the following: R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure

on the rear wheels. R Improved driving stability when braking,

especially on bends.

Driving and parking 155

Function of STEER CONTROL

STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering recommendation is given in the fol lowing situations: R Both right wheels or both left wheels are on

a wet or slippery road surface when you brake R The vehicle starts to skid

System limits STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R ESP is deactivated. R ESP is malfunctioning. R The steering is malfunctioning.

If ESP is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering.

HOLD function

HOLD function The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand still without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic. The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsi bility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver.

System limits The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary. R The incline must not be greater than 30%.

Activating/deactivating the HOLD function

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle

If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away: R If there is a malfunction in the system or

in the power supply. R If the HOLD function is deactivated by

depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

# Always secure the vehicle against roll ing away before you leave it.

Requirements: R The vehicle is stationary. R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on

the driver's side is fastened. R The engine is running or has been automati

cally switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

156 Driving and parking

R The electric parking brake is released. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti

vated. R Vehicles with automatic transmission:

The transmission is in positionh,k ori

Activating the HOLD function # Depress the brake pedal, and after a short

time quickly depress further until the display appears in the multifunction display.

# Release the brake pedal.

Deactivating the HOLD function # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or # Depress the brake pedal until the dis

play disappears from the multifunction dis play.

The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow ing situations: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa

ted. R Vehicles with automatic transmission:

The transmission is switched to positionj.

R The vehicle is secured with the electric park ing brake.

In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission positionj and/or by the electric parking brake: R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's

door is opened. R The vehicle is switched off. R There is a malfunction in the system or the

power supply is insufficient.

Function of Hill Start Assist

Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the fol lowing conditions: R Vehicles with automatic transmission:

The transmission is in positionh ork. R The electric parking brake is released.

This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away

After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle. # Swiftly move your foot from the brake

pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist.

Start-off assist

Function of the start-off assist The start-off assist enables optimal vehicle acceleration from a standstill. For this, a suitably high-grip road surface is required, the tires and vehicle must also be in good condition. Do not activate the start-off assist on public roads. Be sure to observe the safety notes and informa tion on ESP (/ page 154).

Driving and parking 157

Activating the start-off assist

& WARNING Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning

When you use start-off assist, individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle.

If ESP is deactivated, there is a risk of skid ding and accident! # Make sure that no persons or obstacles

are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.

# Deactivating ESP (/ page 155). # Move the steering wheel to the straight-

ahead position. # Depress the brake pedal firmly with your left

foot and keep it depressed. # Engage theh drive position (/ page 139). # Select the sportiest available drive program B orC(/ page 135).

# Rapidly depress the accelerator pedal fully.

# Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum accelera tion.

# Switch on ESP once the acceleration proce dure is complete. ESP will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.

Canceling the start-off assist # Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. # Reactivate the ESP.

ATTENTION ASSIST

Function of ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto nous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fati gue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a well-

rested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation. You can choose between two settings: R Standard: normal system sensitivity. R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The

driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adap ted accordingly.

If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! warning appears in the Instrument Dis play. You can acknowledge the message and take a break where necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes.

158 Driving and parking

You can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance menu of the on-board computer: R The length of the journey since the last

break. R The attention level determined by ATTENTION

ASSIST: - The fuller the circle, the higher the atten

tional level determined - As your attention wanes, the circle in the

center of the display becomes smaller

If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System Suspended message appears. If a warning is given in the Instrument Display, the multimedia system offers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start naviga tion to this rest area. This function can be activa ted and deactivated in the multimedia system. If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the Instrument Display when the engine is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically when the engine is re-started. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored.

System limits ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range. Particularly in the following situations, ATTEN TION ASSIST only functions in a restricted man ner and warnings may be delayed or not occur: R If you have been driving for less than approx

imately 30 minutes.

R If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes). R If there is a strong side wind. R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor

nering speeds or high rates of acceleration). R If the Steering Assist function of Active Dis

tance Assist DISTRONIC is active. R If the time has been set incorrectly. R If you change lanes and vary your speed fre

quently In active driving situations.

The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness assessment is reset and restarted when continu ing the journey in the following situations: R If you switch off the engine. R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the

driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break).

Driving and parking 159

Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Attention Assist

Setting options # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.

Suggesting a rest area # Select Suggest Rest Area. # Activate or deactivate the function.

If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or increasing lack of attention, it suggests a rest area in the vicinity.

# Select the suggested rest area. You are guided to the selected rest area.

Speed control cruise control

Function of cruise control Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver. If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your

foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. You can store any speed above 15 mph (20 km/h) up to the maximum design speed. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 151). MercedesAMG vehicles: Cruise control is available up to a maximum speed of 155 mph (250 km/h).

Displays on the multifunction display Rh (gray): cruise control is selected but

not yet activated. Rh (green): cruise control is active.

A stored speed appears along with theh dis play. % The segments between the stored speed and

the end of the segment display light up in the speedometer.

System limits Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the engine's brak ing effect. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheat ing and wearing too quickly. Do not use cruise control in the following situa tions: R In traffic situations which require frequent

changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on winding roads. R On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause

the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. R If you are driving when visibility is poor.

160 Driving and parking

Operating cruise control

& WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed

If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates. # Take into account the traffic situation

before calling up the stored speed.

Requirements: R ESP must be activated, but not intervening. R The vehicle speed is at least 15 mph

(20 km/h). R The transmission is in positionh.

Operating cruise control # Press the rocker switches on the steering

wheel control panel up or down to the desired position.

Activating cruise control # SelectM with the right rocker switch.

Activating cruise control

# Press rocker switch1 upM or down N. The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle.

or # SelectJ with the left rocker switch.

The last stored speed is called up and main tained by the vehicle. If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored.

% When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted.

Increasing or decreasing the stored speed # 1 mph (1 km/h): press rocker switch1 up M or downN to the pressure point.

or # 5 mph (10 km/h): press rocker switch1 up M or downN beyond the pressure point.

or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed

and press rocker switch1 upM. Adopting a detected speed

Driving and parking 161

# Activate cruise control. # If a traffic sign has been detected and is dis

played in the instrument cluster: selectJ with the left rocker switch. The maximum permissible speed shown by the traffic sign is stored and the vehicle maintains or does not exceed this speed.

Deactivating cruise control # SelectO with the left rocker switch.

Switching off cruise control # SelectN with the right rocker switch. % If you brake, deactivate ESP or if ESP

intervenes, cruise control is deactivated.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles in front are detected, the set distance is main tained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a

halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depend ing on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel. Available speed range: R Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack

age: 15 mph (20 km/h) - 120 mph (200 km/h) R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack

age: 15 mph (20 km/h) - 130 mph (210 km/h)

Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: R Adjusts the driving style depending on the

selected drive program (fuel-saving, comfort able or dynamic) R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if

the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack

age:

- Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles)

- Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on highways or on multi-lane roads with separate roadways (country- dependent)

Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package and Parking Package: if the vehicle has been braked to a standstill on multi-lane, separate roadways by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, it can automatically follow the vehicle in front driving off again within 30 seconds. If a critical situation is detected when driving off, a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 151).

162 Driving and parking

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays in the instrument cluster

Assistance display 1 Route-based speed adaptation: type of route

event (/ page 167) 2 Vehicle in front 3 Distance indicator 4 Set specified distance 5 Active Lane Change Assist lane change dis

play

Permanent status display of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Rk (white): Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC selected, specified distance set Rk (white vehicle, green speedometer):

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, specified distance set and vehicle detected Rk (green): Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC active, specified distance set and vehicle detected Rr: Route-based speed adaptation active

(/ page 167).

The stored speed is shown along with the per manent status display and highlighted on the speedometer. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the speed is grayed out. % On highways or high-speed major roads, the

green vehicle symbol is displayed cycli cally when the vehicle is ready to pull away.

% If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to pas

sive mode. The Suspended message appears in the multifunction display.

Display on the speedometer The stored speed is highlighted on the speedom eter. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment is less than the stored speed due to the route event ahead, the segments in the speedometer light up. Deactivation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, as well as altera tions to the speed due to manual or automatic adoption of the maximum permissible speed, are displayed in the control feedback of the multi function display on a single line.

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is

glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R The windshield in the area of the camera is

dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.

Driving and parking 163

R In parking garages or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients. R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as

bicycles or motorcycles.

In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accel erating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations.

& WARNING Risk of accident from acceler ation or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel erate or brake in the following cases, for example: R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis

tance Assist DISTRONIC. R If the stored speed is called up and is

considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed.

R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects.

# Always carefully observe the traffic con ditions and be ready to brake at all times.

# Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf ficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not suffi cient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. # Adjust your speed and maintain a suita

ble distance from the vehicle in front. # Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take

evasive action.

& WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction: R when driving on a different lane or when

changing lanes R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta

tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles R to complex traffic conditions R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic

As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. # Always observe the traffic conditions

carefully and react accordingly.

Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Requirements: R The electric parking brake is released. R ESP is activated and is not intervening.

164 Driving and parking

R The transmission is in positionh. R The driver's door is closed. R Check of the radar sensor system has been

successfully completed. R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not being

used to park the vehicle or to exit from a parking space.

# To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the rocker switches on the steering wheel control unit up or down to the desired position.

Activating/deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Press theH button.

Activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # To activate without a stored speed: press

rocker switch1 upM or downN, or selectJ with the left rocker switch.

or # To activate with a stored speed: select J with the left rocker switch.

# Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle.

Adopting a detected speed limit # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.

# If a traffic sign has been detected and is dis played in the instrument cluster: selectJ with the left rocker switch. The maximum permissible speed on the traf fic sign is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed.

Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

and remove your foot from the brake pedal. # SelectJ with the left rocker switch. or # Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and

firmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.

Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Driving and parking 165

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat

If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away. # Always deactivate Active Distance

Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehi cle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat.

# SelectO with the left rocker switch.

% If you brake, deactivate ESP or if ESP intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.

Increasing or decreasing the speed # 1 mph (1 km/h): press rocker switch1 up M or downN to the pressure point.

or # 5 mph (10 km/h): press rocker switch1 up M or downN beyond the pressure point.

or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed

and press rocker switch1 upM. Changing the specified distance to the vehi cle in front # To reduce the specified distance: press

the right rocker switch up (). # To increase the specified distance: press

the right rocker switch down ().

Function of Active Speed Limit Assist If speed limit change between 12 mph (20 km/h) and 80 mph (130 km/h) is detected and the automatic adoption of speed limits is active, it will be automatically adopted as the stored speed (/ page 179). The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permitted within the urban area. The speed limit display in the Instrument Display is always upda ted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign.

If there is no speed restriction on an unlimited stretch of road (e.g. on a freeway), the recom mended speed is automatically adopted as the stored speed. The system uses the speed stored on an unlimited stretch of road as the recom mended speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on an unlimited stretch of road, the rec ommended speed is 80 mph (130 km/h). If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelera tor pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 151).

System limits The system limits of Traffic Sign Assist apply to the detection of traffic signs (/ page 178). Speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) are not automatically adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly detected by the system. The

166 Driving and parking

maximum permissible speed applying to a vehi cle with a trailer is not detected by the system. Adjust the speed in these situations.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed

The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as: R at speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) R in wet conditions or in fog R when towing a trailer

# Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations.

# Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions.

Function of route-based speed adaptation When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is acti vated, the vehicle speed will be adapted accord ingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, the vehicle negoti

ates a route event ahead in an economical, com fortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account. You can activate and deactivate route-based speed adaptation in the multimedia system (/ page 168). The following route events are taken into account: R Curves R T-intersections, roundabouts and toll stations R Turns and exits R Traffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic

Information )

% When the toll station is reached, Active Dis tance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as the stored speed.

Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indi cator to change lanes is switched on and one of the following situations is detected: R Turning off at intersections

R Driving on slowing-down lanes R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down

lanes

The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to intersections, round abouts and traffic lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a stand still. When route guidance is active, the first speed adjustment is carried out automatically. If the turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected route is confirmed and further speed adjustment is activated. Speed adaptation is canceled in the following cases: R If the turn signal indicator is switched off

before the route event. R If the driver depresses the accelerator or

brake pedal during the process.

System limits Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver

Driving and parking 167

is responsible for complying with road traffic regulations and driving at a suitable speed. The speed adaptation made by the system may not always be suitable, particularly in the follow ing situations: R The road's course not clearly visible R Road narrowing R Varying maximum permissible speeds in indi

vidual lanes R Wet road surfaces, snow or ice

In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation

Route-based speed adaptation can malfunc tion or be temporarily unavailable in the fol lowing situations: R If the driver does not follow the calcula

ted route R If map data is not up-to-date or available

R In the event of roadworks R In bad weather or road conditions R If the accelerator pedal is depressed R In the event of electronically displayed

speed limitations

# Adapt the speed to the traffic situation.

Setting route-based speed adaptation

Requirements: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa

ted. R ECO Assist is active.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Route-based Speed # Activate or deactivate the function.

When the function is active, the vehicle speed is adjusted depending on the route events ahead.

% Further information on the route-based speed adaptation (/ page 167).

Active Steering Assist

Function of Active Steering Assist Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The system helps you to stay in the center of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a refer ence. % Depending on the country, in the lower

speed range Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding traffic as a reference. If nec essary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance when driving away from the center of the lane, for example, to form a rescue lane.

If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case.

Status display of Active Steering Assist in the multifunction display R (gray): activated and passive R (green): activated and active

168 Driving and parking

R (red): system limits detected R (white, red hands): "hands on the steer

ing wheel" prompt

% During the transition from active to passive status, the symbol is shown as enlarged and flashing. Once the system is passive, the symbol is shown as gray in the multifunction display.

% Depending on the selected vehicle settings, Active Steering Assist may be unavailable.

Steering and touch detection The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to inter vene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time.

If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steer ing wheel, display1 appears. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning mes sage. If the driver does not react to the warning for a considerable period, the system can initiate an emergency stop (/ page 170). The warning is not issued or is stopped when the driver gives confirmation to the system: R The driver steers the vehicle.

R Depending on the country: the driver presses a steering wheel button or operates Touch Control

If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 151).

System limits Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane or to drive through exits. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances: R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain,

fog, heavy spray, greatly varying ambient light or strong shadows on the road. R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,

direct sunlight or reflections. R Insufficient road illumination.

Driving and parking 169

R The windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker. R No, or several, unclear lane markings are

present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, for example, in a construction area or at intersections. R The lane markings are worn away, dark or

covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too

short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R The road is narrow and winding. R There are obstacles on the lane or projecting

out into the lane, such as object markers.

The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions: R On tight curves and when turning. R When crossing intersections. R At roundabouts or toll plazas. R When the tire pressure is too low.

& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops func tioning

If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane. # Always keep your hands on the steering

wheel and observe the traffic carefully. # Always steer the vehicle paying atten

tion to traffic conditions.

& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes

The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steering interventions. # Steer according to traffic conditions.

Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist

Requirements: R ESP is activated, but is not intervening. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa

ted.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Selecta Steering Assist.

Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist

170 Driving and parking

If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steer ing wheel, display1 appears in the multifunc tion display. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message. If the driver still does not respond to the warn ing, the Beginning Emergency Stop message appears in the multifunction display. If the driver still does not respond, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC reduces the speed. The vehicle is decelerated in stages to a standstill. Depending on the country, at speeds below 40 mph (60 km/h) the hazard warning lights switch on automatically. When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out: R The vehicle is secured with the electric park

ing brake. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended R The vehicle is unlocked.

R If possible, an emergency call is placed to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center

The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering R Braking or accelerating R Deactivating Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC

Active Lane Change Assist

Function of Active Lane Change Assist Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver when changing lanes by applying steering torque if the driver operates a turn signal indicator. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 151). Assistance when changing lanes is provided if all the following conditions are met: R You are driving on a freeway or road with

multiple lanes in the direction of travel.

R The neighboring lane is separated by a bro ken lane marking. R No vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane. R The vehicle speed is between 50 mph

(80 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h). R Active Lane Change Assist is switched on in

the multimedia system. R Active Steering Assist is activated and active.

If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and a lane change is permitted, the lane change begins after the driver has activated the turn sig nal indicator. This is shown to the driver with a green arrow next to the steering wheel symbol. The Lane Change to the Left message, for example, also appears. If Active Lane Change Assist has been activated with the turn signal indicator but a lane change is not immediately possible, a gray arrow appears next to the steering wheel symbol, which remains green. When the lane change assistance starts, the turn signal indicator is automatically activated along with the display in the multifunction display.

Driving and parking 171

If the assistance graphic is shown when chang ing lanes, an additional arrow appears in it point ing towards the adjacent lane (/ page 162). If a lane change is not possible, the arrow is faded out after a few seconds and a new lane change must be initiated. An immediate lane change is only possible on freeway sections without speed limits. If the system is impaired, Active Lane Change Assist may be canceled. If it is canceled, the Lane Change Canceled message appears in the multifunction display. In addition, a warning tone may sound, depend ing on the situation.

& WARNING Risk of accident when chang ing lane to an occupied adjacent lane

Lane Change Assist cannot always clearly detect if the adjacent lane is free. The lane change might be initiated although the adjacent lane is not free.

# Before changing lanes, make sure that the neighboring lane is free and there is no danger to other road users.

# Monitor the lane change.

& WARNING Risk of accident if Lane Change Assist unexpectedly stops func tioning

If the system limitations for Lane Change Assist have been reached, there is no guar antee that the system will remain active. Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you by applying steering torque. # Always monitor the lane change and

keep your hands on the steering wheel. Observe the traffic conditions and steer and/or brake if necessary.

System limits The system limitations of Active Steering Assist apply to Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 168).

The system may also be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The sensors in the rear bumper are dirty,

damaged or covered by a sticker or ice and snow, for example. R The exterior lighting shows a malfunction.

% The Active Lane Change Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Lane Change Assist is unavailable or only partially available during this teach-in process; no arrow appears next to the Active Steering Assist symbol when the turn signal indicator is activated.

Activating/deactivating Active Lane Change Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Lane Change Assist # Activate or deactivate the function.

172 Driving and parking

Active Brake Assist

Function of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions: R Distance warning function R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent braking assistance R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack

age: Evasive Steering Assist and cornering function

Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli sion, a warning tone sounds and theL dis tance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt.

If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. In especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning lamp and warning tone occur simultaneously with the braking applica tion. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak ing, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to max imum full-stop braking if necessary. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 151).

If autonomous braking or situation-dependent braking assistance has occurred, display1 appears in the multifunction display and then automatically goes out after a short time. If the autonomous braking function or the situa tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered, additional preventive measures for occupant protection (PRE-SAFE) may also be initiated.

Driving and parking 173

& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist

Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa tions. # Always pay careful attention to the traf

fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone. Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a sufficiently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec essary.

Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist.

The individual subfunctions are available in various speed ranges: The distance warning function can issue a warn ing in the following situations: R From approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), if your

vehicle is critically close to a vehicle, cyclist or pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent warning tone and theL distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated ten sioning of the seat belt.

Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi ded it is safe to do so and the traffic situation allows this.

Distance warning function (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package) The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching stationary vehi cles, moving pedestrians and cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph

(60 km/h) when approaching crossing cyclists

Distance warning function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead

174 Driving and parking

R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching moving pedes trians and cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 43 mph

(70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists

Autonomous braking function (vehicles with out Driving Assistance Package) If the vehicle is traveling at speeds above approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 124 mph

(200 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead

R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) when approaching moving pedes trians and crossing cyclists R at speeds up to approximately 31 mph

(50 km/h) when approaching stationary vehi cles

Autonomous braking function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) If the vehicle is traveling at speeds above approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph

(100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 43 mph

(70 km/h) when approaching stationary and

moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists

Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack age) The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching stationary vehi cles and vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph

(60 km/h) when approaching moving pedes trians and crossing cyclists

Driving and parking 175

Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph

(100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph

(80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph

(60 km/h) when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists

Canceling a brake application of Active Brake Assist You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by: R sharply depressing the accelerator pedal or

with kickdown

R releasing the brake pedal

Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake appli cation when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: R You maneuver to avoid the obstacle. R There is no longer a risk of collision. R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of

your vehicle.

Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac teristics: R The ability to detect stationary or moving

pedestrians. R Assistance through power-assisted steering if

it detects a swerving maneuver. R Activation by an abrupt steering movement

during a swerving maneuver. R Assistance during swerving and straightening

of the vehicle.

R Reaction from a speed of approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) up to a speed of approx imately 43 mph (70 km/h).

You can prevent the assistance at any time by actively steering.

Cornering function (only vehicles with Driv ing Assistance Package) If a danger of collision from an oncoming vehicle is detected when turning across an oncoming lane, autonomous braking can be initiated at speeds below 9 mph (15 km/h) before you have left the lane in which you are driving.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Eva sive Steering Assist

Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recog nize objects or complex traffic situations clearly. Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not sufficient to avoid a collision.

176 Driving and parking

# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec essary.

# End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations.

# Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle.

System limits Full system performance is not available for a few seconds after switching on the ignition or after driving off. If Active Brake Assist is impaired or inoperative due to a malfunction, the warning lamp appears in the multifunction display. The system may be impaired or may not func tion, particularly in the following situations: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is

glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light.

R If the sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. R If the sensors are impaired due to interfer

ence from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar reflections in parking garages. R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has

been detected and displayed. R In complex traffic situations where objects

cannot always be clearly identified. R If pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into

the sensor detection range. R If pedestrians are hidden by other objects. R If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot

be distinguished from the background. R If a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g.

due to special clothing or other objects. R If the driver's seat belt is not fastened. R On curves with a tight radius.

% The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust auto matically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only

partially available during the teach-in proc ess.

Setting Active Brake Assist

Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Brake Assist # Select the desired setting.

The setting is retained when the drive system is next started.

Deactivating Active Brake Assist % It is recommended that you always leave

Active Brake Assist activated. # Select Off.

The distance warning function, the autono mous braking function and the Evasive Steer ing Assist are deactivated. When the vehicle is next started, the middle setting is automatically selected.

Driving and parking 177

% If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the symbol appears in the status bar of the multifunction display.

Traffic Sign Assist

Function of Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with the multifunction camera (/ page 152). It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions in the instrument cluster. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 151). Since Traffic Sign Assist also uses the data stored in the navigation system, it can update the display in the following situations without detecting traffic signs. The camera also detects traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). These are only displayed if a restric tion applies or if the system cannot clearly deter mine whether the restriction applies.

Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well.

Display in the Instrument Display

Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit 1 Maximum permissible speed 2 Maximum permissible speed when there is a

restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction

% Vehicles with a standard Instrument Dis play: a + symbol next to a traffic sign in the Instrument Display indicates that additional traffic signs have been detected. These can also be displayed in the media display and optionally in the Head-up Display.

178 Driving and parking

If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the maxi mum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the Instrument Display:

This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a country where Traffic Sign Assist is not sup ported. Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. % Also observe the information on display mes

sages in Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 332).

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi

cient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,

direct sunlight or reflections.

R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog ged up, damaged or covered. R If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due

to dirt or snow, because they are covered, or due to insufficient lighting. R If the information in the navigation system's

digital map is incorrect or out-of-date. R If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs

on construction sites or in adjacent lanes. R If you turn sharply when passing traffic signs

outside the camera's field of vision.

Setting Traffic Sign Assist

Requirements: R Only vehicles with Driving Assistance

Package: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and ECO Assist must be activated for the automatic adoption of speed limits.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Traffic Sign Assist

Activating or deactivating automatic adop tion of speed limits (only vehicles with Driv ing Assistance Package) # Select Limit Adoption. # Activate or deactivate the function.

The speed limits detected by Traffic Sign Assist are automatically adopted by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.

% If one of the following systems is activated, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Cruise control R Variable limiter

Further information (/ page 164).

Displaying detected traffic signs in the media display # Select Display in Central Display.

Driving and parking 179

# Activate or deactivate the function.

Setting the type of warning # Select Visual & Audible, Visual or Off.

Setting the warning threshold This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded. # Select Warning Threshold. # Set the desired speed.

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning

Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor the area up to 130 ft (40 m) behind and 10 ft (3 m) next to your vehicle. If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx imately 8 mph (12 km/h) and this vehicle subse quently enters the monitoring range directly next to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red.

Permanent status display in the instrument clus ter: R (gray): system is activated but inopera

tive R (green): system is activated and opera

tional

If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the cor responding direction, a double warning tone sounds and the red warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes. If the turn signal indicator remains switched on, all other detected vehicles are indicated only by the flashing of the red warning lamp. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist

Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly different speed.

Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation. # Always pay careful attention to the traf

fic situation and maintain a safe dis tance at the side of the vehicle.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 151).

Exit warning The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occu pants about approaching vehicles when leaving the vehicle when stationary.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning

The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to vehicles approaching you at a greatly differing speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations.

180 Driving and parking

# Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clear ance.

If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this is indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant opens the door on the side with the warning, a warning tone sounds and the warning lamp in the outside mirror starts to flash. This additional function is only available when Blind Spot Assist is active. When the exit warn ing is activated, it can warn vehicle occupants for up to three minutes after switching the igni tion off. The exit warning is no longer available once the warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes three times. The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi tute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi cle occupants.

System limits Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations, in par ticular: R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors

are obscured R In poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or

snow R If there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or

motorbikes R If the road has very wide or narrow lanes R If vehicles are not driving in the middle of

their lane

Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is suffi cient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles. Warnings may be interrupted when driving along side long vehicles, for example trucks, for a pro longed time. Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged.

The exit warning may be limited in the following situations: R When the sensors are covered by adjacent

vehicles in narrow parking spaces R When people approach the vehicle R In the event of stationary or slowly moving

objects

Function of brake application (Active Blind Spot Assist) If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor recting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. The course-correcting brake application is availa ble in the speed range between approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h).

& WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist

A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision.

Driving and parking 181

# Always steer, brake or accelerate your self, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course- correcting brake application.

# Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.

If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mir ror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a dis play1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappro priate brake application. This brake application

may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.

System limits Note the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Assist; you may otherwise not recognize the dan gers (/ page 180). Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur in the following situations: R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are

located on both sides of your vehicle. R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds. R You brake or accelerate significantly. R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP

or Active Brake Assist. R ESP is deactivated. R A loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire is

detected.

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance # Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist. or # Activate or deactivate Act. Blind Spot Assist.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunc tion camera (/ page 152). It serves to protect you against unintentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned by vibration pulses in the steering wheel and guided by a course-correct ing brake application back into your lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h). Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. It

182 Driving and parking

cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. The status of Active Lane Keeping Assist is dis played in the on-board computer: R (green): Active Lane Keeping Assist is

active and operating. R (gray): Active Lane Keeping Assist is

active but not operating. R: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactiva

ted or there is a malfunction.

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, dis play1 appears in the multifunction display. The system does not apply the brake if you acti vate the turn signal indicator. Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: if the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, it will apply the brake regardless of the turn signal indicator. You are warned by vibrations in the steering wheel in the following circumstances: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane

marking. R A front wheel drives over this lane marking.

Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles without Driving Assis tance Package) Lane markings were detected on both sides of the lane. The front wheel drives over a continu ous lane marking. % A brake application may be interrupted at

any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction.

Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) R A continuous lane marking was detected and

driven over with the front wheel. R A lane marking and an approaching vehicle,

an overtaking vehicle or vehicles driving par allel to your vehicle were detected in the adjacent lane. The front wheel drives over the lane marking.

% A brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction.

System limits No lane-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations: R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel

erate. R If a driving safety system intervenes, such as

ESP, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist.

Driving and parking 183

R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of accel eration. R When ESP is deactivated. R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has

been detected and displayed.

If you deactivate the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning and the lane markings cannot be clearly detected, it is possible that no lane correcting brake application takes place (/ page 184). The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi

cient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,

the sun or reflections. R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc

tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog ged up, damaged or covered.

R If there are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks. R If the lane markings are worn, dark or cov

ered. R If the distance from the vehicle in front is too

short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g.

lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. R If the road is very narrow and winding. R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack

age: if the radar sensors in the rear bumper are dirty or covered in snow and an obstacle is detected in your lane, no lane-correcting brake application takes place.

Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist # Activate or deactivate the function.

Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activating or deactivating the haptic warning # Select Warning.

Activate or deactivate the function.

Function of adaptive damping adjustment

Suspension with adaptive damping adjustment continuously adjusts the characteristics of the suspension dampers to the current operating and driving conditions. The damping is set individually for each wheel and is affected by the following factors: R the road surface conditions R vehicle load R the drive program selected R the driving style

The drive program can be adjusted using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.

184 Driving and parking

Rear view camera

Function of the rear view camera When you engage reverse gear, the image from the rear view camera is shown in the media dis play. Dynamic guide lines show the path the vehicle will take with the current steering angle. This helps you to orient yourself and to avoid obstacles when backing up. The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and park ing. % You can open the cover of the rear view cam

era manually (/ page 189). The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances dis played only apply to road level. Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select from the following views: R Normal view

R Wide-angle view

The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror.

Vehicles without Parking Assist PARKTRONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:

Normal view 1 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur

face) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)

2 Yellow guide line at a distance of approx imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear area

3 Yellow lanes marking the course the tires will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)

4 Bumper 5 Red guide line at a distance of approximately

1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area

Wide-angle view

Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:

Driving and parking 185

Normal view 1 Yellow lanes marking the course the tires

will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)

2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur face) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)

3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area

4 Yellow warning indicator of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance between approximately 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m)

5 Red warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are very close (approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less)

6 Orange warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium dis tance away (between approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m))

Wide-angle view

System failure If the rear view camera is not operational, the following display appears in the multimedia sys tem.

System limits The rear view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R The trunk lid is open. R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at

night. R Cameras, or vehicle components in which

the cameras are installed, are damaged, dirty or covered. Observe the information on vehi cle sensors and cameras (/ page 152).

% Do not use the rear view camera in these types of situations. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.

% The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.

186 Driving and parking

% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.

360 camera

Function of the surround view camera The surround view camera is a system that con sists of four cameras. The cameras cover the immediate vehicle surroundings. The system assists you when you are parking or at exits with reduced visibility, for example. The views of the surround view camera are always available when driving forwards up to a speed of approx. 10 mph (16 km/h) and when backing up. The surround view camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show them at all. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surround ings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and park ing.

The system evaluates images from the following cameras: R Rear view camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors

% You can open the cover of the rear view cam era manually (/ page 189).

Views of the surround view camera You can select from different views:

1 Wide-angle view, front 2 Top view with image from the front camera

3 Top view with images from the side cameras in the outside mirrors

4 Wide-angle view, rear 5 Top view with image from the rear view cam

era 6 Top view with trailer view (vehicles with a

trailer hitch)

Top view

1 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering wheel angle

2 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

3 Your vehicle from above

Driving and parking 187

The color of the individual segments of warning display2 is based on the distance to the detec ted obstacle: R Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance

between approx. 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m) R Orange segments: obstacles at a distance

between approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m) R Red segments: obstacles at a very short

distance of approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less

When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and no object is detected, the segments of the warning display are shown in gray.

Guide lines

1 Yellow lane marking the course the tires will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur face) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area

4 Mark at a distance of approx. 3.3 ft (1.0 m)

% When Active Parking Assist is active, lane markings1 are displayed in green.

The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances apply to road level.

Side view of the mirror cameras The sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view.

1 Guide line of external vehicle dimensions with outside mirrors folded out

2 Marker of the wheel contact points

System failure If the system is not ready for operation, the fol lowing message appears in the media display:

188 Driving and parking

System limits The surround view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situa tions: R The doors are open. R The outside mirrors are folded in. R The trunk lid is open. R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at

night. R Cameras, or vehicle components in which

the cameras are installed, are damaged, dirty or covered. Observe the information on vehi cle sensors and cameras (/ page 152).

% Do not use the surround view camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.

For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images. % The contrast of the display may be impaired

by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.

% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.

See the notes on cleaning the surround view camera (/ page 261).

Calling up the view of the surround view camera using reverse gear # Shift to reverse gear. # Select the desired view in the multimedia

system (/ page 187). # If, after shifting to reverse gear, the image of

the rear view camera is not shown: switch off the ignition, press and hold thec button, switch on the ignition and engage reverse gear again.

Opening the camera cover of the rear view camera Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking # Select Open Camera Cover. % The camera cover closes automatically after

some time or after an ignition cycle.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system with ultrasound. It monitors the area around your vehicle using mul tiple sensors on the front bumper and on the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC shows you the distance between your vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the sur roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuver ing and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in

Driving and parking 189

the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in/exiting parking spaces. In the standard setting, an intermittent warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) to an obstacle in front and approx imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) to an obstacle behind. A continuous warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 0.7 ft (0.2 m). Using the Warn Early All Around setting in the multimedia sys tem, the warning tones for front and side impact protection can be set to sound at a greater dis tance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) in front and 2.0 ft (0.6 m) on the sides (/ page 194). % The Warn Early All Around setting is always

active at the rear of the vehicle.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the multimedia system

Vehicles without surround view camera

Vehicles with surround view camera

If you have not selected the Camera & Parking menu and an obstacle is detected in the path of the vehicle, a pop-up window for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC1 appears in the multimedia sys tem at speeds below 6 mph (10 km/h). The color of the individual segments of the warn ing display is based on the distance to the detec ted obstacle: R Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance

between approx. 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m)

190 Driving and parking

R Orange segments: obstacles at a distance between approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m) R Red segments: obstacles at a very short

distance of approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less

Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC in the Head-up Display

Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) in front2 and 2.0 ft (0.6 m) on the sides3 can also be displayed in the Head- up Display.

System limits Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa rily take into account the following obstacles: R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g.

persons, animals or objects. R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g.

overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks.

The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (/ page 152).

Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Example: vehicles with surround view camera

When rear segments1 or all-round segments 2 light up red and the symbol appears in the multifunction display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may have been deactivated due to signal interference. Start the vehicle again and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different location.

Driving and parking 191

If a warning tone also sounds for approximately two seconds every time the vehicle is started, it may be due to one of the following causes: R The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors

and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (/ page 261). R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been

deactivated due to a malfunction: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Function of the passive side impact protec tion Passive side impact protection is an additional Parking Assist PARKTRONIC function which warns the driver about obstacles at the side of the vehicle. A warning is issued when obstacles are detected between the front and rear detec tion range. In order for an object on the side to be detected, the sensors in the front and rear bumper must first detect the object while you are driving past it. During the parking procedure or when maneu vering, objects are detected as the vehicle drives past. If you steer in the direction of a detected

obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued and the segments light up in color in the display. The segment color changes depending on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Yellow: approximately 1.0 - 2.0 ft

(30 - 60 cm) R Red: less than approximately 1.0 ft (30 cm)

In order for lateral front or rear segments to be displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance of at least half of the vehicle length. Once the vehicle has traveled the length of the vehicle, all of the lateral front and rear segments can be dis played.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles without a surround view camera

1 Operational front and rear 2 Operational front, rear and sides 3 Obstacle detected at the front right (yellow)

and rear (red)

192 Driving and parking

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles with a surround view camera

1 Operational front and rear 2 Operational front, rear and sides 3 Obstacles detected at the front right (red)

Saved obstacles on the sides are deleted in the following situations, for example: R You park the vehicle and switch off the igni

tion. R You open the doors.

After the engine is restarted, obstacles on the sides must be detected again before a new warning can be issued.

System limits The system limits for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC apply to passive side impact pro tection. The following objects are not detected, for exam ple: R Pedestrians who approach the vehicle from

the side R Objects placed next to the vehicle

Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC using the multimedia system

* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or maneuvering the vehi

cle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could oth erwise be damaged.

Requirements: R The camera menu is open. R Or: Active Parking Assist is active. R Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window

appears.

# Tap= in the media display.

If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is not lit or the symbol appears in the instru ment cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically

activated when the vehicle is started. Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in the quick access menu.

Driving and parking 193

Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking

Adjusting the volume of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Volume. # Set a value.

Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Pitch. # Set a value.

Specifying the starting point for the warning tones You can specify whether the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence when the vehicle is further away from an obsta cle. # Select Warn Early All Around. # Activate or deactivate the function.

Activating/deactivating audio fadeout You can specify whether the volume of a media source in the multimedia system is to be reduced when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds a warning tone. # Select Audio Fadeout During Warning Tones. # Activate or deactivate the function.

Active Parking Assist

Function of Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system, which uses ultrasound with the assistance of the rear view camera and sur round view camera. When you are driving for wards up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), the system automatically measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist offers the following func tions: R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road R Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to

the road (optionally either forwards or reverse)

R Exiting parking spaces if you have parked using Active Parking Assist

As soon as all requirements are met for search ing for parking spaces, the display appears in the multifunction display. When Active Parking Assist has detected parking spaces, the display appears in the multi function display. The arrows show on which side of the road detected parking spaces are located. They are then shown in the media display. The parking space can be selected as desired. Depending on the location of the parking space, the parking direction (rearwards or forwards) can also be selected as desired. When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated based on the cal culated path of your vehicle. When you are entering or exiting a parking space, the procedure is assisted by acceleration, braking, steering and gear changes. Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no

194 Driving and parking

persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. Active Parking Assist will be canceled in the fol lowing situations: R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated. R You begin steering. R You apply the parking brake. R Vehicles with automatic transmission:

you engage transmission positionj. R ESP intervenes. R You open the doors or the trunk lid while

driving.

System limits If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active Parking Assist is not available. Objects located above or below the detection range of the sensors, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks, or the bor ders of parking spaces, are not detected during measurement of the parking space. These are also then not taken into account when calculat ing the parking procedure. In some circumstan

ces, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space incorrectly.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist

If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise: R Active Parking Assist may steer too early. R The vehicle may not stop in front of these

objects.

This could cause a collision. # In these situations, do not use Active

Parking Assist.

Extreme weather conditions, such as snow or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground.

Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations: R In extreme weather conditions such as ice,

packed snow or in heavy rain. R When transporting a load that protrudes

beyond the vehicle. R On steep uphill or downhill gradients of more

than approximately 15%. R When snow chains are installed. R Directly after a tire change or when spare

tires are installed. R If the tire pressure is too low or too high. R If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g.

after bottoming out on a curb.

Active Parking Assist may also display parking spaces that are not suitable for parking, such as: R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited. R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.

Driving and parking 195

Parking with Active Parking Assist % Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the

button may also be located at a different position on the center console.

# Press button1.

The media display shows the view of Active Park ing Assist. Area2 displays detected parking spaces4 and vehicle path3. % Vehicle path3 shown on the media display

may differ from the actual vehicle path. # If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehi

cle. # Select desired parking space4 and con

firm. # If necessary, select the parking direction (for

wards or reverse), and confirm. Vehicle path3 is shown, depending on selected parking space4 and the parking direction.

% The turn signal indicator is switched on auto matically when the parking procedure begins.

You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic condi tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica tor accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space

While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road

users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or

cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.

# If, for example, the Please Engage Reverse Gear message appears in the media display:

196 Driving and parking

select the corresponding transmission posi tion. Vehicles with automatic transmission: The vehicle drives into the selected parking space.

% During the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist, the lane markings are dis played in green in the camera image.

On completion of the parking procedure, the Parking Assist Finished, Take Control of Vehicle display message appears. Further maneuvering may still be necessary. # After completion of the parking procedure,

safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the curb.

% You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking pro cedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is availa ble, the system can change the transmission position again or cancel the parking proce dure.

Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist

Requirements: R The vehicle has been parked with Active

Parking Assist.

% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the button may also be located at a different position on the center console.

Please note that you are responsible for the vehi cle and surroundings during the entire parking procedure. # Start the vehicle.

# Press button1. The media display shows the view of Active Parking Assist.

Driving and parking 197

# If the vehicle has been parked perpendicular to the direction of travel: in area2, select direction of travel3 Left or Right.

% The vehicle path shown on the media display may differ from the actual vehicle path.

# Confirm direction of exit3 to drive out of the parking space.

% The turn signal indicator is switched on auto matically when the exiting procedure begins.

You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic condi tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica tor accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space

While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road

users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or

cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.

# If, for example, the Please Engage Forward Gear message appears in the media display: select the corresponding transmission posi tion. The vehicle moves out of the parking space. The turn signal indicator is switched off auto matically.

After the parking space has been exited, a warn ing tone and the Parking Assist Finished,

Take Control of Vehicle message prompt you to take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not automatically braked and can roll away. You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change gear yourself again.

Maneuvering assistance

Function of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is briefly reduced to approx. 1 mph (2 km/h). If a critical situation is detected, the symbol appears in the media display. % You can cancel an intervention by Drive

Away Assist at any time by deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 193).

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist

Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden tify objects and traffic situations.

198 Driving and parking

# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec essary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take eva sive action.

Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. A risk of a collision may arise in the following sit uations, for example: R If the accelerator and brake pedals are mixed

up. R If an incorrect transmission position is

engaged.

Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions: R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated.

R If you shift the transmission position tok or h when the vehicle is stationary. R If the detected obstacle is less than approx.

3.3 ft (1.0 m) away. R If the maneuvering assistance function is

activated in the multimedia system.

System limits The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited on inclines. % Also observe the system limits of Parking

Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 189).

Function of Cross Traffic Alert % Cross Traffic Alert is only available for vehi

cles with Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist.

Cross Traffic Alert can warn drivers of any cross ing traffic when backing up and maneuvering out of a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. If a critical situation is detected, the L symbol appears in the media display and the vehicle can be braked automatically.

If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible. Cross Traffic Alert is active under the following conditions: R If the vehicle is backing up at walking pace. R Maneuvering assistance is activated

(/ page 199).

% Also observe the instructions on Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 180).

System limits Cross Traffic Alert is not available on inclines.

Activating/deactivating the maneuvering assistant Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking # Switch Maneuvering Assistance on or off. % The maneuvering assistant must be active

for the function of Drive Away Assist (/ page 198) and Cross Traffic Alert (/ page 199).

Driving and parking 199

Vehicle towing instructions The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems can lead to damage on the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys tems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side. Comply with the per mitted towing methods (/ page 278) and the instructions for towing with both axles on the ground (/ page 279).

200 Driving and parking

Notes on the Instrument Display and on- board computer

& WARNING Risk of accident due to an Instrument Display malfunction

If the Instrument Display has failed or mal functioned, the function restrictions applying to safety relevant systems are not visible. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately

at a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment

If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. The on-board computer shows only display mes sages and warnings from specific systems on the multifunction display. You must therefore ensure that your vehicle is always reliable. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Instrument Display and on-board computer 201

Instrument display overview

1 Display content on left (example: speedome ter): speedometer/time/date/trip computer From Start and From Reset/range/audio The segments on the speedometer indicate the status of the following systems: cruise control/limiter/Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

2 Outside temperature

3 Digital speedometer 4 Time 5 Display content on right (example: tachome

ter): tachometer/average fuel consumption/ECO display/navigation/G- meter/assistance display

The fuel supply will be interrupted to protect the engine when the red mark on the tach ometer (overrevving range) is reached.

6 Index points These show the selected display or menu content.

7 Coolant temperature display

202 Instrument Display and on-board computer

During normal operation, the coolant tem perature display is permitted to rise to 248F (120C). Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical sys tem: POWER and CHARGE display (electrical drive support and recuperation power of the electric motor)

8 Selected drive program 9 Selected transmission position A Multifunction display (example: standard dis

play for trip): Assistance/Telephone/Naviga tion/Trip/Media/Radio/Styles and dis plays/Service

B Fuel level, fuel filler flap location indicator, range

Overview of the buttons on the steering wheel

1P Back/Home button (press and hold), on-board computer

2 Touch Control, on-board computer 3 Control panel for cruise control or Active

Distance Assist DISTRONIC

4 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys tem (/ page 208) Voice Control System

5 To call up the home screen of the mul timedia system

6 Touch Control multimedia system 7 % Back button (multimedia system) 8 Brightness control to adjust the lighting in

the Instrument Display and in the control elements of the vehicle interior

Operating the on-board computer Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operat ing the on-board computer.

Instrument Display and on-board computer 203

The on-board computer is operated using the left-hand Touch Control and the left-hand back/ home button. When the on-board computer is being operated, different acoustic signals will sound as operating feedback, e.g. when the end of a list is reached or when you are scrolling through a list. The following menus are available: R Assistance R Phone R Navigation R Trip R Radio

R Media R Designs & Disp. R Service

% You can find information about the possible settings and selections on the menus in the Digital Operator's Manual.

# To call up the menu bar: press the left-hand back button until the menu bar is displayed.

% Vehicles without Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the button to call up the menu bar of the on-board computer.

# To scroll in the menu bar: swipe left or right on the left-hand Touch Control.

# To call up a menu, submenu or possible settings on the menu, or confirm a selec tion or setting: press the left-hand Touch Control.

# To scroll through displays or lists on the menu, or select display content, a func tion, an entry or a display: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Con trol.

# To exit a submenu: press the left-hand back button.

Selecting the Head-up Display # To switch on the Head-up Display: switch

on the Head-up Display via the multimedia system or activate it in the menu bar by swip ing upwards on the left-hand Touch Control. The Head-up Display menu will be selected on the Head-up Display.

# To switch to the Head-up Display: press the left-hand Touch Control or swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control.

# To set the three display ranges of the Head-up Display: swipe upwards or down wards on the left-hand Touch Control.

Full-screen menus Vehicles with an instrument display in the widescreen cockpit: the following menus can be shown full-screen on the instrument display: R Assistance R Trip

204 Instrument Display and on-board computer

# On the corresponding menu, use the left- hand Touch Control to scroll to the end of the list.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control. The selected menu will be displayed full- screen.

Overview of what is shown on the multi function display Displays on the multifunction display u Active Parking Assist (/ page 196) Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated

(/ page 193) h Cruise control (/ page 160) Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

(/ page 162) Active Brake Assist (/ page 173) Active Steering Assist (/ page 168) Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 182) Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 171) ECO start/stop function (/ page 132)

HOLD function (/ page 156) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 112)

Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: Detected instructions and traffic signs (/ page 178).

Head-up Display Function of the Head-up Display

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

The Head-up Display projects the following infor mation into the driver's field of vision above the cockpit, for example: R The vehicle speed R Information from the navigation system R Information from the driving systems and

driving safety systems R Some warning messages

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, different content can be shown in the three areas of the Head-up Display (/ page 206).

Display content

1 Navigation instructions 2 Current speed 3 Detected instructions and traffic signs 4 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. cruise

control)

Instrument Display and on-board computer 205

System limits The visibility of the displays will be affected by the following conditions: R Seat position R Image position setting R Ambient light conditions R Wet road R Objects on the display cover R Polarization in sunglasses

% In extreme sunlight, sections of the display may appear washed out. You can correct this by deactivating and reactivating the Head-up Display.

Setting the Head-up Display using the on- board computer

On-board computer: 4 HEAD-UP DISPLAY The following Head-up Display settings or dis plays can be selected or shown: R Position

R Brightness R Messages R Assistance status R Telephone R Audio R Voice Control System

# To select the Settings menu: swipe to the right on the left-hand Touch Control. The Settings menu5 will be selected.

# To call up the Settings menu: press the left-hand Touch Control.

# To adjust the position: swiping up or down on the left-hand Touch Control.

# To adjust the brightness: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control.

Setting messages, assistance status, tele phone, audio and the Voice Control System # Press the left-hand Touch Control.

The list of setting options will be displayed.

# Swipe upwards or downwards on the left- hand Touch Control and select a setting by pressing the left-hand Touch Control.

Selecting what the Head-up Display shows

(Example) 1 To switch the Head-up Display on/off 2 Left display area

Navigation system Average consumption G-meter

3 Central display area Speedometer

206 Instrument Display and on-board computer

Set speed in the driver assistance system, e.g. cruise control Warnings from driver assistance systems, e.g. distance warning

4 Right display area Traffic Sign Assist Assistant display

5 To configure the settings 6 Index points

Display areas2 to4 that are not required can be hidden. % In audio mode, the station name or track will

be shown temporarily when the audio source is being actively operated. In addition, the latest calls will be displayed when the tele phone list on the Instrument Display is actively operated.

# To select a display: swiping up or down on the left-hand Touch Control.

Switching the Head-up Display on/off via the multimedia system

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select HUD.

The Head-up Display is activated.

Instrument Display and on-board computer 207

Overview and operation Notes on the MBUX multimedia system

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment

If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the

traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the

vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.

Overview of the MBUX multimedia system

1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system

2 Media display with touch functionality 3 Touchpad 4 Controller

Turn: adjusts the volume

Press briefly: switches the mute function on/off Press and hold: switches the multimedia sys tem or media display on or off

5 Buttons for navigation, radio/media and telephone

6 Buttons for vehicle functions/system set tings and favourites/themes

Further operating options: R Conducting a voice dialog with the Voice

Control System. R Operating functions contact-free with the

MBUX Interior Assistant.

% You can find further information about oper ation as well as about applications and serv ices in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Anti-theft protection This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information on protection against theft can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

208 MBUX multimedia system

Home screen overview

1 Depending on the display, calls up the first three applications or the home screen

2 Calls up the profile 3 Calls up the global search 4 SOS NOT READY (only when the Mercedes-

Benz emergency call system is not available) 5 Mercedes me connect active

6 Transmission of vehicle position active 7 Signal strength of the mobile phone network,

network display, battery status of the mobile phone connected, time

8 Calls up the Notifications Center 9 Calls up an application using the symbol A Application and current information

B Quick-access, e.g. enter home address C Index points and selected display area D Calls up the air conditioning menu E Calls up SUGGESTIONS, THEMES and

FAVORITES

MBUX multimedia system 209

% If Mercedes me connect is active5, the vehicle is linked with Mercedes me connect. Vehicle data is then transmitted to the back- end system. What data is transmitted depends on which services are activated. Further details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data protection information. The function is coun try-dependent. If transmission of vehicle position is active 6, Mercedes me connect services have been activated for this vehicle which access the vehicle's geoposition. In which instances the geoposition is transmitted depends on the particular services. Further details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data protection informa tion. The function is country-dependent.

Operating the MBUX multimedia system

Using Touch Control

1 Calls up the home screen 2 Touch Control 3G Pressing briefly: returns to the previ

ous display 4 Pressing the rocker switch down

briefly: shows favourites

Pressing the rocker switch down and holding: adds favourites and themes VOL: control adjusts the volume or switches the sound off8 (press) 6 Pressing the rocker switch up: makes or accepts a call ~ Pressing the rocker switch down: rejects or ends a call

Navigation through the menus is carried out with Touch Control2 with single-finger swipes. # To select a menu option: swipe and press. # To move the digital map: swipe in any

direction.

Using the touchscreen # Select menu options, symbols or characters

by pressing briefly. # To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left

or right. # To use handwriting to enter characters:

write the character with one finger on the touchscreen.

210 MBUX multimedia system

# To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart.

# To call up the global menu: press and hold on the touchscreen until the OPTIONS menu appears.

Using the touchpad

1G Returns to the previous display 2~ Calls up the audio control menu

Swiping to the left of right: selects the previ ous or next radio station/music track

3 Calls up the home screen 4 Touchpad

# To select a menu option: swipe and press. # To use handwriting recognition: write a

character on the touchpad. # To open or close the Notifications Cen

ter: swipe down or up with two fingers. # To zoom in and out of the map: move two

fingers together or apart.

Calling up applications using buttons

1y Calls up vehicle functions 2z Calls up navigation 3| Calls up radio or media 4 % Calls up the telephone 5 Press briefly: calls up favourites

Press and hold: adds a favourite or theme

# Alternatively, tap on the touchscreen. # Call up the application (/ page 209).

MBUX multimedia system 211

Functions of the Voice Control System

With the Voice Control System, various applica tions in the MBUX multimedia system are opera ble using voice input. The Voice Control System is operational approximately thirty seconds after the ignition is switched on and is available for the driver's seat and front passenger seat. The following multimedia system applications can be operated: R Navigation R Telephone R Media player R Messages R Vehicle functions

Starting the Voice Control System

# Press rocker switch1 up. or # Say "Hello Mercedes".

Overview of the MBUX Interior Assistant

& WARNING Risk of injury from the cam era's laser radiation

This product uses a classification 1 laser sys tem. If the housing is opened or damaged, laser radiation may damage your retina. # Do not open the housing. # Always have maintenance work and

repairs carried out by a qualified spe cialist workshop.

This product complies with the requirements of the FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 with exception of the variations according to the FDA Laser Notice No. 50 from 24. June 2007. The camera is located in the overhead control panel. If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX Interior Assistant, selected functions of the multimedia system can be operated contact-free. The MBUX Interior Assistant can differentiate between driver and front passenger interactions and detects specific hand positions (poses).

212 MBUX multimedia system

System limits, display messages and notes for rectification The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The camera in the overhead control panel

may heat up due to operating conditions. As a result the camera may switch off tempora rily, particularly during longer periods of operation and at high outside temperatures. Do not touch or cover the camera and wait until the camera has cooled down and is available again.

R The camera is covered or dirty, fogged up or scratched. Wait until the camera has cooled down before cleaning the camera lens. Clean the outside of the camera lens with a dry or damp cotton cloth. Do not use micro fiber cloths. Do not remove the cover when cleaning. R Recognition can be impaired by reflective

clothing, an adverse color of clothing or by accessories, for example.

R Clothing being worn (hat, shawl, scarf) may be limiting the detection area of the camera. Keep the camera's field of vision clear. R The camera is not operational.

Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen ter.

MBUX multimedia system 213

The MBUX Interior Assistant supports the following interactions:

Interaction area Interaction Description

In front of the media display or above the touchpad

Proximity to the control element The Interior Assistant recognizes the approach of the hand towards a con trol element. Depending on the active application, the display will be adjusted in the media display. Some functions differentiate between driver and front passenger. No specific hand position is required.

Above the center console Defined pose A favorite is called up with a defined pose.

Below the inside rearview mirror Brief up and down movements With brief vertical up and down movements below the inside rearview mir ror the reading light for the driver or the front passenger is switched on and off.

Above the front passenger seat Stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat

By stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat the search light is switched on. If you withdraw a hand from this area, the search light is switched off again.

214 MBUX multimedia system

Switching the reading light and search light and on or off

Requirements: R For the reading light: the function is availa

ble when it is dark. R The hand movement takes place in the inter

action area below the inside rearview mirror. R For the search light: the function is availa

ble when it is dark. R The hand movement takes place in the inter

action area above the front passenger seat. R The seat belt on the front passenger seat

must not be inserted in the seat belt buckle.

Switching the reading light on and off

# Briefly move a hand up or down beneath the inside rearview mirror. The reading light is switched on or off for the driver or the front passenger.

Switching the search light on and off

# To switch on: reach across the front passenger seat with a hand. The search light is switched on for the driver.

# To switch off: take a hand back away from the front passenger seat. The search light is switched off again.

Information on profiles, themes, suggestions and favourites

For electrically adjustable seats observe the fol lowing notes.

MBUX multimedia system 215

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile

Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the posi tion saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of

driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of move ment.

If there is a risk of someone becoming trap ped, stop the adjustment process immedi ately: # a) Tap the warning message on the

media display. or

# b) Press a memory position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process will be stop ped.

The driver's seat is equipped with an access pre venter. If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set after calling up the driver's profile. Profiles store your vehicle settings and settings for the multimedia system. If the vehicle is used by several drivers, the driver can select their own profile without changing the stored profile settings of other drivers. % Information on profiles from Mercedes me

connect can be found in the Digital Opera tor's Manual.

Vehicle settings are, for example, driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror settings, climate con trol and ambient lighting. For the settings of the multimedia system, you can select, for example, radio stations, previous destinations as well as themes, suggestions and favourites.

For recurring driving situations, such as long drives on the freeway, you can save your prefer red settings in a theme in the vehicle. In a theme you can save the display of the digital map, your preferred radio station and preferred drive pro gram, for example. The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It then offers suggestions for the most probable navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations or contacts. The pre-requirements for that are the selection of a profile, your consent to the recording of data and sufficient collected data. Favourites provide quick access to applications that are used often. You can select favourites from categories or add them directly to an appli cation.

216 MBUX multimedia system

Configuring profiles, themes and sugges tions

Multimedia system: 4 5f Profiles

Creating a new profile # SelectW Create Profile . # Select an avatar. # Enter the name and confirm witha. # Select Continuer . # Select Current Settings. # Select Save. # Activate Bluetooth and select Connect

Phone, to connect a mobile phone with the user profile .

# Select Finish.

Selecting profile options # Select for a profile.

The following functions are available: R Editing, resetting or deleting a profile R Resetting themes or favorites

R Configuring suggestions

Configuring suggestions # Select for a profile. # Select Suggestion Settings. # Switch Allow Destination Suggestions, Allow

Music Suggestions and Allow Contact Sug- gestions on or off.

# To deactivate the learning function for one day: activate Deact. Learning for 24 h. For 24 hours no new actions will be trained and no data recorded for the active profile. Suggestions will continue to be shown. Example: if the option is switched on and a route to a new destination has been calcula ted, this destination would not be taken into account for the learning function.

Creating new themes # Select. # Select THEMES. # SelectW Create Theme.

The settings which are saved in the theme are shown.

# Select Continuer. # Select Audio and Navigation (Navigation) and

store the active settings in the theme. # Select Continuer. # Select an entry screen. # Select Continuer. # Select an image. # Enter the names into the entry field and con

firm witha. # Select Save.

System settings Overview of the system settings menu

In the system settings menu, you can make set tings in the following menus and control ele ments: R Display

- Styles - Instrument lighting - Display brightness

MBUX multimedia system 217

- Edge lighting - Day/night design R Control elements

- Keyboard language and handwriting rec ognition

- Sensitivity of the touchpad - Sensitivity of the Touch Controls R Voice Control System R Sound

- Entertainment - Navigation and traffic announcements - Telephone - Voice amplification to the rear compart

ment R Connectivity

- Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, NFC R MBUX Remote Control

- Authorizing and deauthorizing devices R Time & date R Language

R Units for distance R Software updates R Data import/export R PIN protection R System Reset

Information on important system updates

Important system updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data. Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured. A system update consists of three steps: R Downloading or copying of the data required

for installation R Installation of the downloaded system update R Activation of the downloaded system update

by restarting the system

% If automatic software updates are activated, the system updates will be downloaded auto matically.

The multimedia system provides a message when a system update is available. You have the following selection options: R Accept and Install

The system update will be downloaded in the background. R Information

Information about the pending system update is displayed. R Later

The system update can be downloaded man ually at a later time.

Deep system updates Deep system updates access vehicle or system settings and can therefore only be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off. If the download of a deep system update is com pleted and the downloaded system update is ready for installation, you will be informed of this after the next ignition cycle, for example.

218 MBUX multimedia system

% Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location before starting the installation.

Requirements for the installation: R The ignition is switched off. R Notes and warnings have been read and

accepted. R The electric parking brake is applied.

If all requirements have been fulfilled, the down loaded system update is installed. The multime dia system cannot be operated while the down loaded system update is being installed and vehicle functions are restricted. If errors should occur during the installation, the multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version. If restoration of the previous version is not possible, a symbol appears on the media display. Consult a quali fied specialist workshop to resolve the problem.

Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot

Requirements: R To set up the Wi-Fi connection of the mul

timedia system with external hotspots: there is no communication module installed. R The device to be connected supports at least

one of the types of connection described.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth

Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi # Select Wi-Fi.

Connecting the multimedia system with an external hotspot using Wi-Fi The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. % The connection procedure may differ

depending on the device. Follow the instruc tions that are shown in the display. Further information can be found in the manufactur er's operating instructions.

# Select Internet Settings. # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select Add Hotspot.

Connecting using a security key # Select the optionsr of the desired Wi-Fi

network. # Select Connect Using Security Key. # Have the security key displayed on the device

to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

# Enter this security key on the multimedia sys tem.

# Confirm the entry with.

Connecting using a WPS PIN # Select the optionsr of the desired Wi-Fi

network. # Select Connect via WPS PIN Input.

The multimedia system generates an eight- digit PIN.

# Enter this PIN on the device to be connected. # Confirm the entry.

MBUX multimedia system 219

Connecting using a button # Select the optionsr of the desired Wi-Fi

network. # Select Connect via WPS PBC. # Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options

on the device to be connected (see the man ufacturer's operating instructions).

# Press the WPS button on the device to be connected.

# Select Continue in the multimedia system.

Activating automatic connection # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select the optionsr of the desired Wi-Fi

network. # Activate Permanent Internet Connection.

Connecting with a known Wi-Fi # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select a Wi-Fi network.

The connection is established again.

Configuring the multimedia system as a Wi- Fi hotspot for external devices The type of connection established depends on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of connec tion established must be selected on the multi media system and on the device to be connec ted. # Select Vehicle Hotspot. # Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot.

Connecting using WPS PIN generation # Select Connect via WPS PIN Generation. # Enter the PIN shown in the media display on

the device to be connected and confirm.

Connecting using WPS PIN entry # Select Connect via WPS PIN Input. # Enter the PIN that is shown on the external

device's display on the multimedia system.

Connecting using a button # Select Connect via WPS PBC.

# Press the push button on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

# Select Continue.

Connecting using a security key # Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot.

A security key is displayed. # Select the vehicle from the device to be con

nected. The vehicle is displayed with the DIRECT-MBUX XXXXX network name.

# Enter the security key which is shown in the media display on the device to be connected.

# Confirm the entry.

Connecting using NFC # Select Connect via NFC. # Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the

manufacturer's operating instructions). # Hold the device to be connected at the vehi

cle's NFC interface. # Select Finished.

The mobile device is now connected to the multimedia system hotspot via NFC.

220 MBUX multimedia system

Generating a new security key # Select Vehicle Hotspot. # Select Generate Security Key.

A connection will be established with the newly created security key.

# To save a security key: select Save. When a new security key is saved, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-estab lished, the new security key must be entered.

Navigation Switching navigation on

Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation (Navigation) # Alternatively: press thez button.

The map shows the vehicle's current posi tion. The navigation menu is shown. The navigation menu is hidden if route guid ance is active.

# To show: tap on the touchscreen. The menu is hidden automatically.

MBUX multimedia system 221

Navigation overview

Example: digital map with navigation menu 1 To enter a POI or address and additional des

tination entry options 2 To cancel active route guidance 3 To repeat a navigation announcement and

switch navigation announcements on or off

4 ON THE WAY menu with Route Overview, Alternative Routes and Report Traffic Inci- dent (Car-to-X) TRAFFIC menu with Traffic Announcements, Area Alerts and Live Traffic Subscription Info To display Route List

POSITION menu with Save Position and Compass

5 Quick access for Traffic, Parking and High- way Information as well as options for View, Announcements and Route via Advanced

222 MBUX multimedia system

Entering a destination

Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation 5 Where to?

1 The federal state or province in which the vehicle is located

2 Entering a POI or address 3 List with additional destination entry options 4 Deletes an entry

5 a Confirms an entry 6 Switches to handwriting recognition 7 Enters a space 8 Switches to voice input 9 Sets the written language

A Switches to digits, special characters and symbols

B Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters

MBUX multimedia system 223

# Enter the destination in2. The entries can be made in any order. The following entries can be made, for exam ple: R City, street, house number R Street, city R ZIP code R POI name or POI category, e.g. Parking R Contact name

# Select a search result in list3. # Calculate the route (/ page 224). % You can find further information about desti

nation entry, e.g. 3 word addresses, in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Changing country # Select the indicator for federal state or prov

ince1. # Select the federal state or the province in 1.

# Enter the country indicator. # Select the country on list3.

# Select the federal state or the province from list3.

Using online search Destination entry uses online map services. If the on-board search finds no suitable destina tions or if you change countries, the online search is available. For the destination you can enter an address, a POI or a 3 word address. # Select country indicator1. # Select the provider for the online service

from the countries list. or # If the on-board search delivers no results,

enter the destination in input line2. # Select the destination in the list.

The detailed view for the route is displayed.

Calculating a route and using settings for route guidance

Requirements: R The destination has been entered.

R The destination address is shown.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation

1 No route yet. A route has been mapped.

# Select. The route to the destination is calculated. Route guidance begins.

or # Select.

224 MBUX multimedia system

# Select Set as Waypoint. The destination address is set as the next intermediate destination.

or # Select Start New Route Guidance.

The destination address is set as the new destination. The previous destination and the intermediate destinations are deleted. Route guidance to the new destination begins.

Selecting route settings # SelectZ. # Select Advanced. # Select Route. # Select the route type. # Take traffic information into consideration

with Dynamic Route Guidancer. # Select route options with Avoid Options. # Activate Suggest Alternative Route.

Alternative routes are calculated for every route.

# Activate Activate Commuter Route. If the requirements are met, the multimedia system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. Route guidance begins without voice output.

Using map functions

Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation

Setting the map scale # To zoom in: tap twice quickly with one finger

on the media display. # To zoom out: tap with two fingers on the

media display.

Moving the map # Move one finger in any direction on the

touchscreen. # To reset the map to the current vehicle

position: press\ briefly.

Selecting map orientation # Tap repeatedly on the compass symbol

on the map. The view changes in the sequence 3D, 2D Heading Up to 2D North Up.

Switching freeway information on/off # SelectZ. # Switch Highway Information on or off.

Using services

Requirements: R There is an Internet connection. R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have set up a user account in the

Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle is connected to a user account

and you have accepted the conditions of use for the service. Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me R The service is available.

MBUX multimedia system 225

R The service has been activated at an author ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation

Displaying the traffic situation with Live Traf fic Information # SelectZ. # Activate Traffic. # Select Advanced. # Select View. # Select Map Elements. # Switch on Traffic Incidents, Free Flowing

Traffic and Delay. If traffic information has been received, then traffic incidents such as roadworks, road blocks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warn ing messages are displayed. The traffic delay is displayed for the current route. Traffic delays lasting one minute or longer are taken into consideration.

Displaying hazard warnings with Car-to-X- Communication If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display depends on the settings for the Traffic and Traf- fic Incidents options. # Set the options.

If Traffic is switched off and Traffic Incidents is switched on, the symbols are shown on the prospective route.

Displaying weather information and other map contents # SelectZ. # Select Advanced. # Select View. # Select Map Elements. # Scroll up and show the ONLINE MAP CON-

TENT category. # Switch on a service, e.g. Weather.

Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover.

Telephone Telephony

Notes on telephony

& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper ating integrated communication equip ment while the vehicle is in motion

If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the

traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the

vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

226 MBUX multimedia system

& WARNING Risk of an accident from operating mobile communication equip ment while the vehicle is in motion

Mobile communications devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This could also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. # As the driver, only operate mobile com

munications devices when the vehicle is stationary.

# As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile communications devices in the areas intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they can

not be thrown around in such situa tions.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets.

# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compart ment.

Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly: R Loading the vehicle (/ page 98) R Stowing and securing the mobile phone

(/ page 107) Bluetooth connection: The menu view and the available functions in the telephone menu are in part dependent on the Bluetooth profile of the connected mobile phone. Full functionality is only available if the mobile phone supports both of the following Bluetooth profiles: R PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)

- The contacts on the mobile phone are shown automatically on the multimedia system.

R MAP (Message Access Profile) - The mobile phone message functions can

be used on the multimedia system.

Irrespective of this, Bluetooth audio functional ity can by used with any mobile radio unit.

MBUX multimedia system 227

For information on the range of functions of the mobile radio unit to be connected, see the man ufacturer's operating instructions. Network connection: The following cases can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion: R You switch into a transmission/reception

station, in which no communication channel is free. R The SIM card used is not compatible with the

network available R A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged

into the network with the second SIM card at the same time

The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice for improved speech quality. A require ment for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice . Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate.

Further information can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

228 MBUX multimedia system

Telephone menu overview

1 Bluetooth device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone

2 Bluetooth device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode)

3 Battery status of the connected mobile phone

4 Signal strength of the mobile phone network 5 Options 6 Device manager 7 Messages 8 Numerical pad 9 Contact search

Telephony operating modes overview Depending on your equipment, the following tel ephony operating modes are available: R A mobile phone is connected to the multime

dia system via Bluetooth.

MBUX multimedia system 229

R Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth (two phone mode). - You can use all the functions of the multi

media system with the mobile phone in the foreground.

- You can receive incoming calls and mes sages with the mobile phone in the back ground. You can interchange the mobile phone in the foreground and background.

Connecting a mobile phone

Requirements: R Bluetooth is activated on the mobile phone

(see the manufacturer's operating instruc tions). R Bluetooth is activated on the multimedia

system.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Phone

Searching for a mobile phone # Select. # Select Connect New Device.

Connecting a mobile phone Authorization follows using secure simple pair ing. # Select a mobile phone.

A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

# If both codes match, confirm the code on the mobile phone.

Functions in the telephony menu In the telephony menu you have the following functions, for example: R Making calls, e.g.:

- R Accept a call - k End Call - i Create Confer. Call

- Accepting or rejecting a waiting call R Managing contacts, e.g.:

- Downloading mobile phone contacts - Managing the format of a contact's name - Saving a contact as a favorite R Receiving and sending messages, e.g.:

- Using the read-aloud function - Dictating a new message

Mercedes me and apps Mercedes me connect

Information on Mercedes me connect Mercedes me connect consists of multiple serv ices. You can use the following services via the multi media system and the overhead control panel, for example: R Accident and Breakdown Management (me

button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system)

230 MBUX multimedia system

R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (auto matic emergency call and SOS button)

The Mercedes me connect Accident and Break down Management and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center are available to you around the clock. The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel (/ page 232). You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system (/ page 233). Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, first call the national emergency services using the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 239). Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes me connect and other services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Further information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Information on Mercedes me connect Acci dent and Breakdown Management The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions: R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emer

gency call system (/ page 239) If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center for wards the call to Mercedes me connect Acci dent and Breakdown Management. Forward ing the call is however not possible in all countries. R Breakdown assistance by a technician on

location and/or the towing away of the vehi cle to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center You may be charged for these services. R Addition to the emergency guide after auto

matic accident or breakdown detection (/ page 233)

In the event of a breakdown or accident, fur ther vehicle data is sent which enables opti mal support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and the authorized service partner or breakdown assistance. R Addition to the Mercedes me connect

service Telediagnostics With the Telediagnostics function, specific wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly interpreted and are available through the monitoring of components that are sub ject to diagnostics. If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary.

MBUX multimedia system 231

% These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the mobile phone cover age, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the information to appear in the multimedia sys tem.

More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Data transferred during Mercedes me con nect call services The data transferred during a Mercedes me con nect call depends on: R The reason for initiation of the call R The service that is selected in the voice con

trol system R The activated Mercedes me connect services

You can find out which data is transferred when using the services in the currently valid Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me con

nect. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account.

Mercedes me calls

Making a call via the overhead control panel

1 me button for service or information calls 2 SOS button cover 3 SOS button (emergency call system)

Making a Mercedes me call # Press me button1.

232 MBUX multimedia system

Making an emergency call # To open the cover of SOS button2 , press it

briefly. # Press and hold SOS button3 for at least

one second.

If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls.

Information about the Mercedes me call using the me button A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center has been initiated via the me button in the over head control panel or the multimedia system (/ page 232). Using the voice dialog system you access the desired service: R Accident and Breakdown Management R Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for general

information about the vehicle

You can find information on the following topics: R Activation of Mercedes me connect R Operating the vehicle

R Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center R Other products and services from Mercedes-

Benz

Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center (/ page 234).

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system

Requirements: R Access to a GSM network is available. R The contract partner's GSM network cover

age is available in the respective region. R The ignition must be switched on so that

vehicle data can be transferred automati cally.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Phone 5g

# Call Mercedes me connect. After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the media display.

Then, you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center.

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center after automatic accident or breakdown detection

Requirements: R The vehicle has detected an accident or

breakdown situation. R The vehicle is stationary. R The hazard warning lights are switched on.

% This function is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circumstances. In the event an accident or breakdown is detec ted, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. After quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you would like to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center.

MBUX multimedia system 233

# Select Call. R After your agreement, or if the Mercedes

me connect service "Accident and Break down Management" is active, the vehicle data is transferred automatically (/ page 231). R The Mercedes-Benz Customer Center

takes your call and organizes the break down and accident assistance.

You may be charged for these services. % Depending on the severity of the accident,

an automatic emergency call can be initi ated. This has priority over all other active calls.

% In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear after a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined.

% If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center with

Later, the message will be hidden and appear again later. The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics", can either be confirmed or declined. After being declined, this will not be shown again.

Arranging a service appointment via a Mercedes me call If you have activated the maintenance manage ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. You will then receive individual recom mendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multi media system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment. # To arrange a service appointment: select

Call. After your agreement, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-Benz Cus

tomer Center takes your preferred appoint ment date. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet. This will contact you to confirm the appoint ment and if necessary consult about the details.

% If you select Later after the service message appears, the message is hidden and reap pears at a later time.

Transferred data during a Mercedes me call When you make a service call via Mercedes me, data is transmitted. This enables targeted advice and a smooth service. The following requirements must be fulfilled for the transfer of the data: R The ignition is switched on. R The required data transfer technology is sup

ported by the mobile phone network pro vider. R The quality of the mobile connection is suffi

cient.

234 MBUX multimedia system

Multi-stage transfer depends on the following factors: R Reason for the initiation of the call R The available mobile phone transmission

technology. R The activated Mercedes me connect serv

ices. R The service selected in the voice control sys

tem.

Data transfer if Mercedes me connect serv ices are not activated If no Mercedes me connect services are activa ted, the following data is transferred: R Vehicle identification number R Time of the call R Reason for the initiation of the call R Country indicator of the vehicle R Set language for the multimedia system R Telephone number of the communication

platform installed in the vehicle

If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data

If a call is made after automatic accident or breakdown detection using the multimedia sys tem, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data R Current vehicle location

If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center: R Current vehicle location

Data transfer if Mercedes me connect serv ices are activated Only if the respective service is activated will additional incident-specific data be transmitted in the second stage to enable an optimal service. An overview of the data transmitted can be found in the respective terms of use for

Mercedes me connect services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Data processing The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system after the call is finished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services. The incident-specific data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and, if required to process the incident, forwar ded to the service partner authorized by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. Please take note of the data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https:// www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. % The recorded message is not available in

every country.

MBUX multimedia system 235

Overview of the Mercedes me & Apps menu

When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and offers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you. For more information consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or visit the Mercedes me portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com % Make sure you always keep the Mercedes

me apps updated.

You can call up the menu using Mercedes me & Apps in the multimedia system. In the Mercedes me & Apps menu, the following options can be available: R Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes

me user account R Deleting a connection between a Mercedes

me user account and the vehicle

R Calling up the Mercedes me services R Calling up apps such as, In-Car Office or the

web browser depending on availability

Web browser overview

The web browser is started using the Mercedes me & Apps menu.

236 MBUX multimedia system

1 URL entry 2 Bookmarks 3 Web page, back 4 Web page, forwards 5 To refresh/stop 6 Options % Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle

is in motion.

Overview of smartphone integration

With Smartphone Integration, you can use cer tain functions on your mobile phone via the mul timedia system display. Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec ted via Smartphone Integration to the multime dia system. Also for use with two phone mode with smartphone integration, only one additional

mobile phone can be connected using Blue tooth with the multimedia system. The full range of functions for Smartphone Inte gration is only possible with an Internet connec tion. The appropriate application must be down loaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone Integration. The mobile phone must be switched on and connected to a USB port with the symbol on the multimedia system using a suita ble cable.

MBUX multimedia system 237

Apps for Smartphone Integration R Mercedes-Benz Link (implementation of the

function using the Mercedes-Benz Link con trol box) R Apple CarPlay

R Android Auto

You can start Smartphone Integration using the Mercedes me & Apps menu. You can end Smartphone Integration by discon necting the connecting cable between the mobile phone and multimedia system. % Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting

the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary.

Overview of transferred vehicle data When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible. The following system information is transmitted: R Software release of the multimedia system

R System ID (anonymized)

The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation. The following position data is transmitted: R Coordinates R Speed R Compass direction R Acceleration direction

This data is used by the mobile phone to improve the accuracy of the navigation (e.g. for continuation in a tunnel).

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Information on the Mercedes-Benz emer gency call system

Your vehicle is equipped with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ("eCall"). This feature can help save lives in the event of an accident. eCall in no way replaces assistance provided from dialing 911.

Mercedes-Benz eCall only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the wireless service providers. Insufficient net work coverage from the wireless service provid ers may result in an emergency call not being transmitted. eCall is a standard feature in your Mercedes- Benz vehicle. In order to function as intended, the system relies on the transmission of data detailed in the Transmitted Data section that fol lows (/ page 240). To disable eCall, a customer must visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service department to deactivate the vehicle's communication mod ule. Deactivation of this module prevents the activation of any and all Mercedes me con nect services. After the deactivation of eCall, automatic emergency call and manual emergency call will not be available. The ignition must be switched on before an auto matic emergency call can be made. % eCall is activated at the factory.

238 MBUX multimedia system

% eCall can be deactivated by an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer. Please note that in the event ownership of the vehicle is trans ferred to another owner in its deactivated state, eCall will remain deactivated unless the new owner visits an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealership to reactivate the system.

Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

eCall can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access. However, even if a vehicle is equipped with eCall, this does not mean the system is ON. As such, eCall does not replace dialing 911 in the event of an accident. An emergency call can be made automatically (/ page 239) or manually (/ page 240) Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue.

Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar sit uation.

Messages on the display SOS NOT READY: the ignition is not on or eCall not available. During an active emergency call, G appears in the display. You can find more information on the regional availability of eCall at: https://www.mercedes- benz-mobile.com/extra/ecall/ % If there is a malfunction in the Mercedes-

Benz emergency call system (e.g. a fault with the speaker, microphone, airbag, SOS but ton), a corresponding message appears in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster.

Triggering an automatic MercedesBenz emergency call

Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.

R The starter battery is sufficiently charged.

The MercedesBenz emergency call system trig gers an emergency call automatically in the fol lowing cases: R After activation of the restraint systems such

as airbags or Emergency Tensioning Devices after an accident R After an automatically initiated emergency

stop by Active Emergency Stop Assist

The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the

MercedesBenz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted

to the MercedesBenz emergency call center. The MercedesBenz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers.

The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished. It is not possible to immediately end an auto matic emergency call.

MBUX multimedia system 239

If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your

mobile phone. If an emergency call has been initiated: R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic

conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emer gency call center operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides

whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu

lance is sent to the vehicle immediately.

Triggering a manual Mercedes-Benz emer gency call

# To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press and hold the SOS but ton for at least one second (/ page 232).

# To use voice control: use the Voice Control System voice commands .

The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-

Benz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted

to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers. R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic

conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emer gency call center operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides

whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.

If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your

mobile phone.

Ending an unintentionally triggered manual Mercedes-Benz emergency call # Select~ on the multifunction steering

wheel. Depress the button for several sec onds.

Data transfer of the Mercedes-Benz emer gency call system

In the event of an automatic or manual emer gency call the following data is transmitted, for example: R Vehicle's GPS position data R GPS position data on the route

( (a few hundred meters )before the incident) R Direction of travel R Vehicle identification number R Vehicle drive type R Number of people determined to be in the

vehicle R Whether Mercedes me connect is available

or not

240 MBUX multimedia system

R Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically R Time of the accident R Language setting on the multimedia system

Data transmitted is vehicle information. For any questions about the collection, use and sharing of the eCall system data, please contact MBU SA's Customer Assistance Center at 800-FOR- MERC. For Canada, please contact MBC's Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100. Customer requests for covered information should be submitted via the same channels. For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated: R The current vehicle position can be deter

mined. R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants

can be established.

MBUX multimedia system 241

Radio & media Overview of the symbols and functions in the media menu

Symbol Designation Function

6 Play Select to start or continue playback.

8 Rest Select to pause the playback.

: Repeat a track Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist. R Select once: the active playlist is repeated. R Select twice: the current track is repeated. R Select three times: the function is deactivated.

9 Random playback Select to play back the tracks in random order.

/ Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous track.

Options Select to show additional options.

5 Categories Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums, artists, etc.).

Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.

242 MBUX multimedia system

Symbol Designation Function

Z Settings Select to make settings.

Home Select to return to the home screen.

j Messaging Select to call up messaging.

2 Full screen Select to switch to full screen mode.

The following functions and settings are availa ble in the media menu: R Connecting external data storage media with

the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or Bluetooth) R Playing back audio files

Authorizing a Bluetooth audio device for media playback

Requirements: R Bluetooth is activated on the multimedia

system and audio equipment.

R The audio equipment supports the Blue tooth audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP. R The audio equipment is "visible" for other

devices.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Media 5 Bluetooth 5

With Bluetooth audio, you can play back music files from an external data storage medium, e.g. your smartphone, using the MBUX multimedia system. # To play back audio files using the multimedia

system, authorize the external data storage medium on the MBUX multimedia system.

Authorizing a new Bluetooth audio device # Select Connect New Device. # Select an audio device.

Authorization starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

# If the codes are identical, confirm on the audio equipment.

# Select Only as Bluetooth Audio Device. The Bluetooth audio equipment is connec ted with the multimedia system.

MBUX multimedia system 243

Connecting previously authorized Bluetooth audio equipment # Select a Bluetooth audio device from the

list. The connection is being established.

Overview of the symbols and functions in the radio menu

Symbol Designation Function

Home Select to return to the home screen.

j Messaging Select to call up messaging.

/ Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous station.

Z Settings Select to have further options shown. Settings can be made to the following addi tional functions, for example: R Navigation and traffic announcements R Frequency fix function R Radio additional text R Emergency warnings

The setting options are country-dependent.

244 MBUX multimedia system

Symbol Designation Function

HD HD radio Select to switch the HD Radio function on or off. This function is not available in all countries.

8 Silent function Select to switch off the sound.

f Store radio stations Select to save a station in the presets.

4 Station list Select to have the station list shown.

Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.

Additional functions of TuneIn radio % A relatively large volume of data can be

transmitted when using TuneIn Radio.

MBUX multimedia system 245

Symbol Designation Function

Z Settings The following additional settings are available in the TuneIn Radio menu: R Selecting stream R Logging on to or out of the TuneIn account

Favorites Select during playback to save the station cur rently set as a favorite.

6/8 Play/Pause Select to start, stop or continue playback.

5 Browse Select to choose a category and then a radio station.

Additional functions of the satellite radio SIRIUS XM satellite radio offers more than 175 digital-quality radio channels providing 100% commercial-free music, sports, news and enter tainment, for example. SIRIUS XM satellite radio employs a fleet of high-performance satel

lites to broadcast around the clock throughout the USA and Canada. The satellite radio program is available for a monthly fee. Information about this can be obtained from a Sirius XM Service Center and at https://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).

% Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.

246 MBUX multimedia system

Symbol Designation Function

Z Settings The following additional settings are available in the satellite radio menu: R Activate child safety lock to lock channels

with adult content R Set alarm programming for music and sport

alerts R Create TuneMix lists to listen to music seam

lessly

5 Playback control Select to show the timeline. Tap any point on the timeline to skip forwards or back. Navigate to the end of the timeline to return to live mode.

6 Play Select to start or continue playback.

8 Rest Select to pause the playback.

Depending on the frequency band selected, dif ferent functions are available to you.

Select the desired frequency band in the radio menu head runner.

Calling up TuneIn Radio

Requirements:

MBUX multimedia system 247

R The TuneIn Radio service is activated in the Mercedes me Portal. R The data volume is available.

Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. R A fast Internet connection for data transmis

sion free of interference.

% Data volume can be purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal.

% The functions and services are country- dependent. For more information, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Radio # Select TuneIn Radio.

The TuneIn menu appears. The last station set starts playing.

% The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception.

Setting up satellite radio

Requirements: R Satellite radio equipment is available. R Registration with a satellite radio provider

has been completed. R If registration is not included when purchas

ing the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Radio 5 SiriusXM 5Z Options # Select Service Information.

The service information screen appears showing the radio ID and the current sub scription status.

# Establish a telephone connection. # Follow the service staff's instructions.

The activation process may take up to ten minutes.

% You can also have the satellite service acti vated online. To do so, please visit https://

www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https:// www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).

Music and sport alerts

Multimedia system: 4 5 Radio 5 SiriusXM 5Z 5 Alerts

Setting music and sport alerts This function enables you to program an alert for your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events. Music alerts can be saved whilst a track is being played and sport alerts can be saved during a live game. You can also specify sport alerts via the menu option. The system then continuously searches through all the channels. # Set a music or sports alert, to be informed of

matches in the Live program.

Activating the music information function # Activate Music Alerts O.

Setting a music alert # Select Add Alert.

248 MBUX multimedia system

# Select Artists or Song in the dialog window. The alert is set for the current artist or track. If a match is found, a prompt appears asking whether you wish to change to the station.

Activating sports information # Activate Activate Sports Alerts O.

Setting a sport alert # Select Add Alert. # Select the team name or league in the dialog

window.

Deleting individual sports and music alerts # Select Manage Music Alerts. or # Select Manage Sports Alerts. # Select an artist or track. or # Select a team. # Select Delete Selected Entries.

All highlighted alerts are deleted.

Deleting all sports and music alerts # Select Manage Music Alerts. or # Select Manage Sports Alerts. # Select Delete All Entries.

All alerts are deleted.

Sound settings Overview of functions in the sound menu

The setting options and functions available depend on the sound system installed. You can find out which sound system is installed in your vehicle in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Standard sound system and Advanced sound system The following functions are available: R Equalizer:

- Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Volume:

- Automatic adjustment

Burmester surround sound system and Burmester high-end 3D surround sound system The following functions are available: R Equalizer:

- Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Sound focus R VIP seat (Burmester high-end 3D surround

sound system only) R Sound profiles R Volume:

- Automatic adjustment

MBUX multimedia system 249

ASSYST PLUS service interval display Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the Instrument Display provides information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due date. You can hide this service display using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Depending on how the vehicle is used, the ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following cases: R Mainly short-distance driving R When the engine is often left idling for long

periods R In the event of frequent cold start phases

Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions. You can obtain information concerning the serv icing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist

workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Displaying the service due date

On-board computer: 4 Service 5 ASSYST PLUS The next service due date is displayed. # To exit the display: press the back button

on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Operating the on-board computer

(/ page 203).

Information on regular maintenance work

* NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates

Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle.

# Adhere to the prescribed service inter vals.

# Always have the prescribed mainte nance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Special service requirements

The prescribed service interval is based on nor mal operation of the vehicle. Maintenance work will need to be performed more often if the vehi cle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsi bility as regards to whether maintenance work needs to be performed more often than speci fied based on the actual operating conditions and/or loads. Examples of arduous operating conditions: R regular city driving with frequent intermedi

ate stops R mainly short-distance driving

250 Maintenance and care

R frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces R when the engine is often left idling for long

periods R operation in particularly dusty conditions

and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used

In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil and oil filter etc. changed more frequently. The tires must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Fur ther information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery disconnection periods

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can only calculate the service due date when the battery is connected. # Note down the service due date displayed on

the instrument display before disconnecting the battery (/ page 250).

Engine compartment Opening and closing the hood

& WARNING Risk of accident due to driv ing with the hood unlocked

The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood

is locked.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the hood

The hood may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the hood's range of movement. # Open or close the hood only when there

is nobody in the hood's range of move ment.

& WARNING Danger of burns when open ing the hood

If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the

engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine com

partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts

Components in the engine compartment may continue running or start up suddenly, even if the ignition is switched off. Make sure of the following before performing tasks in the engine compartment: # Switch the ignition off.

Maintenance and care 251

# Never reach into the danger zone sur rounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.

# Remove jewelery and watches. # Keep items of clothing and hair away

from moving parts.

& WARNING Risk of injury from touching components under voltage

The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. You could receive an electric shock. # Never touch components of the ignition

system or the fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on.

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine com partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

# Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers while the engine hood is open

When the engine hood is open and the wind shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers

and ignition before opening the engine hood.

Opening the hood

# To release the hood, pull on handle1.

252 Maintenance and care

# Push yellow handle1 on the hood catch to the left as far as it will go (palm downwards). Lift the hood until it is automatically raised by the pneumatic spring.

Closing the hood # Lower the hood and let it drop from a height

of approximately 8 in (20 cm).

# If the hood can still be lifted slightly, open the hood again and close it with a little force until it engages correctly.

Engine oil

Checking the engine oil level using the on- board computer

Requirements: R The engine has been warmed up. R The vehicle is parked on a level surface. R The engine is running at idle speed. R The hood is closed.

The engine oil level is determined during driving. Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style.

On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Engine Oil Level You will see one of the following messages on the multifunction display: R Measuring Engine Oil Level...: measurement

of the oil level is not yet possible.

# Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving. R Engine Oil Level OK and the bar display for

indicating the oil level on the multifunction display is green and is between "min" and "max": the oil level is correct.

R Engine Oil Level Add 1,1 qts. and the bar dis play for indicating the oil level on the multi function display is orange and is below "min":

# Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil. R Reduce Engine Oil Level and the bar display

for indicating the oil level on the multifunc tion display is orange and is above "max":

Maintenance and care 253

# Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a qualified specialist workshop. R For Engine Oil Level Switch Ignition On # Switch on the ignition to check the engine oil

level. R Engine Oil Level System Inoperative: The oil

level sensor is defective or not connected.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. R Engine Oil Level System Currently Unavail. # Close the hood.

Refilling engine oil

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine com partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only

touch component parts described in the following.

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from engine oil

If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart ment, it may ignite. # Make sure that no engine oil is spilled

next to the filler opening. # Allow the engine to cool off and thor

oughly clean the engine oil from compo nent parts before starting the vehicle.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi tives

# Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifi cations explicitly prescribed for the service intervals.

# Follow the instructions on the service interval display for changing the engine oil and observe the prescribed change intervals.

# Do not use additives.

* NOTE Damage caused by refilling too much engine oil

Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. # Have excess engine oil removed at a

qualified specialist workshop.

% Depending on driving style, the vehicle con sumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 l) of oil per 600 miles (1000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds.

254 Maintenance and care

# Turn cap1 counter-clockwise and remove it.

# Add engine oil. # Replace cap1 and turn it clockwise until it

engages. # Check the oil level again (/ page 253).

Checking the coolant level

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine com partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only

touch component parts described in the following.

& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant

If you open the cap, you could be scalded. # Let the motor cool down before opening

the cap. # When opening the cap, wear protective

gloves and safety glasses. # Open the cap slowly to release pres

sure.

# Park the vehicle on a level surface. # Check the coolant temperature display in the

instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be in the bot tom quarter of the temperature display.

# Slowly turn cap1 counter-clockwise to release overpressure.

Maintenance and care 255

# Continue turning cap1 counter-clockwise and remove it.

The coolant level is correct in the following cases: R If the engine is cold, the coolant is up to

marker bar2. R If the engine is warm, the coolant is up to

0.6 in (1.5 cm) over the marker bar2.

# If necessary, add coolant that has been approved for Mercedes-Benz.

% Further information on coolant (/ page 327)

Refilling the windshield washer system

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine com partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

# Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate

Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer

concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.

# Remove cap1 by the tab. # Add washer fluid.

Keeping the air-water duct free

# Keep the area between the hood and the windshield free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow and leaves.

256 Maintenance and care

Checking the brakepad thickness

# Bring the vehicle and wheels into a suitable position so that you can position the gauge.

% The position to place gauge3 depends on the equipment. Depending on the brake cali per used, correct point3 is either in the middle or at the side on the upper end of the brakepad.

# Switch off the engine. # Secure the vehicle against rolling away. # Take the gauge out of the vehicle document

wallet in the glove box. # Place the gauge between the wheel's spokes

in position3 on the brakepad. # Hold the gauge vertically to the brake disc

and slide measuring pin2 onto brake disc 1.

# Check which color field4 the arrow on measuring pin is pointing to. Green: the brakepad thickness is sufficient. Red: the brakepad thickness is not sufficient. Have the brakepads checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

% To avoid an inaccurate measurement: R Make sure the wheels are suitably posi

tioned. R In the case of perforated brake discs, do

not put the measuring pin on one of the bores in the brake disc.

Cleaning and care Notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash

& WARNING Risk of accident due to reduced braking effect after washing the vehicle

The braking effect is reduced after washing the vehicle. # After the vehicle has been washed,

brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until the braking effect has been fully restored.

* NOTE Damage from automatic braking

If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer tain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist

Maintenance and care 257

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit uations: # During towing # In a car wash

* NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash

# Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions.

# Ensure there is sufficient ground clear ance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.

# Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is sufficient.

To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti

vated. R The HOLD function is switched off.

R The surround view camera or the rear view camera is switched off. R The side windows and sliding sunroof are

completely closed. R The blower for the ventilation/heating is

switched off. R The windshield wiper switch is in position

g. R The SmartKey is at a minimum distance of

10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the trunk lid could open unintentionally. R For car washes with a conveyor system: neu

trali is engaged.

% In car washes with a conveyor system: if you leave the vehicle while it is being washed, make sure the SmartKey is located in the vehicle. The park positionj is otherwise automatically engaged.

% If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windshield and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.

Automatic car wash mode In car wash mode, the vehicle is prepared for driving into the automatic car wash. Car wash mode can be activated at a speed of up to 12 mph (20 km/h)(/ page 259). The following settings are made when car wash mode is activated: R The outside mirrors are folded in. R To prevent the windshield washer system

from starting up automatically, the rain sen sor is deactivated. R The rear window wiper is deactivated. R The air conditioning system is set to air-recir

culation mode. R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated. R Vehicles with surround view camera: the

front image is activated after approx. eight seconds.

If one of the settings cannot be selected, this is displayed by a% behind the respective set ting. Above a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h) car wash mode is automatically deactivated.

258 Maintenance and care

The following settings are reset when car wash mode is deactivated: R The outside mirrors are folded out. R The rain sensor is activated. R The rear window wiper is activated. R The air conditioning system is set to fresh air

mode. R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is reset to the

previously selected setting. R Vehicles with surround view camera: the

front image is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h).

Activating/deactivating automatic car wash mode

Requirements: R The vehicle is stationary. R The engine is running.

Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access

Activating automatic car wash mode # Select Automatic Car Wash Mode. # Select Start.

If one of the settings cannot be selected, this is displayed by a% behind the respective set ting. % For an overview of the settings made when

activating automatic car wash mode (/ page 257).

Deactivating automatic car wash mode # Select Stop.

The automatic car wash settings are reset. % The automatic car wash mode is automati

cally deactivated as soon as a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h) is exceeded.

Notes on using a power washer

& WARNING Risk of an accident when using power washers with round-spray nozzles

The water jet can cause externally invisible damage. Components damaged in this way may unex pectedly fail. # Do not use a power washer with round-

spray nozzles. # Have damaged tires or chassis parts

replaced immediately.

To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol lowing when using a power washer: R The SmartKey is at a minimum distance of

10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the trunk lid could open unintentionally. R Maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in

(30 cm) to the vehicle. R Vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your

vehicle are covered with a decorative foil.

Maintenance and care 259

Maintain a distance of at least 27.6 in (70 cm) between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. Move the power washer nozzle around whilst cleaning. The water temperature of the power washer must not exceed 140F (60C). R Observe the information on the correct dis

tance in the implement manufacturer's oper ating instructions. R Do not direct the nozzle of the power washer

directly at sensitive parts, e.g. tires, gaps, electrical components, batteries, light sour ces and ventilation slits.

Washing the vehicle by hand

* NOTE Engine damage due to water ingress

# Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille below the hood.

Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in specially designated wash bays. # Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using

a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.

# Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois.

% Observe the notes on the care of vehicle parts (/ page 261).

Notes on paintwork/matte finish paintwork care

Observe the notes on cleaning and care to avoid damaging the paintwork.

Paint R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and

rinse off the treated areas afterwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off

afterwards.

R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro leum ether or lighter fluid. R Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp

cloth and clean water. R Tar stains: use tar remover. R Wax: use silicone remover. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate

rials. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible.

Matte finish R Only use care products approved for

Mercedes-Benz. R Do not polish the vehicle and alloy wheels. R Only use car washes that correspond to the

latest engineering standards. R Do not use car wash programs with a final

hot wax treatment. R Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polish

ing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax. R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at

a qualified specialist workshop.

260 Maintenance and care

Notes on cleaning decorative foils

Observe the notes on matte finish care in the chapter "Notes on paintwork/matte finish paint work care" (/ page 260). They also apply to matte decorative foils. Observe the notes on cleaning decorative foils to avoid vehicle damage.

Cleaning R For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild

cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible,

whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil irreparably. R If there is dirt on the finish or if the decora

tive foil is dull: use the Paint Cleaner recom mended and approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and

rinse off the treated areas afterwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off

afterwards.

R To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped vehicle with a soft, absorbent cloth after every car wash.

Avoiding damage to the decorative foil R The service life and color of decorative foils

are impaired by: - Sunlight - Temperature, e.g. hot air blower - Weather conditions - Stone chippings and dirt - Chemical cleaning agents - Oily products R Do not use polish on matte decorative foil.

Polishing will have the effect of shining the foil-wrapped surface. R Do not treat matte or structured decorative

foils with wax. Permanent stains may occur.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

You can obtain more information on care and cleaning products from the manufacturer. In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical dif ferences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative foil after removing a decorative foil. % Have work or repairs to decorative foils car

ried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Notes on care of vehicle parts

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windshield wipers are switched on while the windshield is being cleaned

If the windshield wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers

and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.

Maintenance and care 261

& WARNING Risk of burns from the tail pipe and tailpipe trims

The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around

the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area.

# Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following vehi cle parts:

Wheels and rims R Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners. R Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to

remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and

brakepads, drive the vehicle for a few

minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and brakepads warm up and dry out.

Windows R Clean the windows inside and outside with a

damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recom mended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-

based cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows.

Wiper blades R Move the wiper arms into the replacement

position (/ page 115). R With the wiper arms folded out, clean the

wiper blades with a damp cloth. R Do not clean the wiper blades too often.

Exterior lighting R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild

cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. R Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths

that are suitable for plastic lenses.

Sensors R Clean the sensors in the front and rear

bumpers with a soft cloth and car shampoo (/ page 152). R When using a power washer, maintain a mini

mum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm).

Rear view camera and surround view camera R Open the camera cover with the multimedia

system (/ page 189). R Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the

camera lens. R Do not use a power washer.

Tailpipes R Clean with a cleaning agent recommended

for Mercedes-Benz, especially in the winter and after washing the vehicle. R Do not use acidic cleaning agents.

262 Maintenance and care

Notes on care of the interior

& WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of sol vent-based care products

Care and cleaning products containing sol vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away. # Do not use any care or cleaning prod

ucts containing solvents to clean the cockpit.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from bleached seat belts

Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident. # Never bleach or dye seat belts.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the fol lowing notes on cleaning and care:

Seat belts R Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. R Do not dry by heating them to over 176F

(80C) or exposing them to direct sunlight.

Display R Switch off the display and let it cool down. R Clean the surface carefully with a microfiber

cloth and a suitable display care product (TFT-LCD). R Do not use any other agents.

Plastic trim R Clean with a damp microfiber cloth. R For heavy soiling: use a cleaner recommen

ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate

rials. R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or

sun cream to come in contact with the plas tic trim.

Real wood and trim elements R Clean with a microfiber cloth.

R Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and soapy water. R For heavy soiling: use a cleaner recommen

ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents,

polishes or waxes.

Headliner R Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.

Carpet R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent rec

ommended for Mercedes-Benz.

Steering wheel made of genuine leather or DINAMICA

* NOTE Damage caused by wrong cleaners

# Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover or wheel cleaner; neither should you use pol ishes or waxes. Otherwise you may damage the finish.

R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water solution and then wipe with a dry cloth.

Maintenance and care 263

R For heavy soiling: use a cleaner recommen ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Leather care: use a leather care agent that

has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not allow the leather to become too

damp. R Do not use a microfiber cloth.

% Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface properties, such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle color differences.

Genuine leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a

dry cloth. R Leather care: use a leather care agent that

has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not allow the leather to become too

damp. R Do not use a microfiber cloth.

DINAMICA seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth. R Do not use a microfiber cloth.

Imitation leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water. R Do not use a microfiber cloth.

Fabric seat covers R Clean with a damp microfiber cloth and 1%

soap solution and allow to dry.

264 Maintenance and care

Emergency Removing the safety vest

The safety vests are located in the storage com partments in the driver's and front passenger door. # To remove: pull out the safety vest bag by

the loop. # Open the safety vest bag and pull out the

safety vest. % There are also safety vest compartments in

the rear door storage compartments in which safety vests can be stored.

1 Maximum number of washes 2 Maximum wash temperature 3 Do not bleach 4 Do not iron 5 Do not tumble dry 6 Do not dry clean 7 Class 2 safety vest

The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed. Replace the safety vest in the following cases: R The reflective strips are damaged or dirty

R The maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded R The fluorescence has faded

Warning triangle

Removing the warning triangle

Breakdown assistance 265

# Push both sides of warning triangle holder 1 in the direction of the arrow and open it.

# Remove warning triangle2.

Setting up the warning triangle

# Fold side reflectors1 upwards to form a tri angle and attach at the top using upper press-stud2.

# Fold legs3 down and out to the side.

First-aid kit (soft-sided) overview

First-aid kit (soft sided)1 is in the trunk in the left-hand or right-hand storage net, depending on the model. % Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the

first-aid kit (soft-sided) is in the recess in the side trim.

Flat tire Notes in the event of a flat tire

& WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tire

A flat tire severely affects the driving charac teristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle. Tires without run-flat characteristics: # Do not drive with a flat tire. # Change the flat tire immediately with an

emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified spe cialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics: # Observe the information and warning

notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tire).

266 Breakdown assistance

In the event of a flat tire, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equip ment: R Vehicles with MOExtended tires: it is pos

sible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires) (/ page 267). R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair

the tire so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 268). R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you

can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown (/ page 232). R All vehicles: change the wheel

(/ page 311).

% The emergency spare wheel is only available in certain countries.

Notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires)

& WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode

When driving in emergency mode the han dling characteristics are impaired. # Do not exceed the specified maximum

speed of the MOExtended tires. # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving

maneuvers as well as driving over obstacles (curbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle.

# Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice: R Banging noise R Vehicle vibration R Smoke which smells like rubber R Continuous ESP intervention R Cracks in the tire side walls

# After driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a qualified special

ist workshop with regard to their further use.

# The defective tire must be replaced in every case.

With MOExtended tires (run-flat tires), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. How ever, the tire affected must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tire. Vehicles with tire pressure loss warning sys tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con junction with an activated tire pressure loss warning system. Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con junction with an activated tire pressure monitor ing system.

Breakdown assistance 267

If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display, proceed as follows: R Check the tires for damage. R If driving on, observe the following notes.

Driving distance possible in emergency mode after the pressure loss warning:

Load condition Driving distance pos sible in emergency

mode

Partially laden 50 miles (80 km)

Fully laden 19 miles (30 km)

The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tire, you can use a stand ard tire as a temporary measure.

TIREFIT kit storage location

The TIREFIT kit is located under the trunk floor.

1 Tire sealant bottle 2 Tire inflation compressor

Depending on the model, the TIREFIT kit may also be located in other places under the trunk floor.

Using the TIREFIT kit

Required tools: R Tire sealant bottle R TIREFIT sticker

R Sticker with details of the maximum permis sible speed R Tire inflation compressor R Gloves

TIREFIT kit storage location: (/ page 268) You can use TIREFIT tire sealant to seal perfora tion damage of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -4 F (-20 C).

& WARNING Risk of accident when using tire sealant

The tire sealant may be unable to seal the tire properly, especially in the following cases: R There are cuts or punctures in the tire

larger than damage previously men tioned. R The wheel rim is damaged. R You have driven at very low tire pressure

or on a flat tire.

268 Breakdown assistance

# Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tire sealant

The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita tion. Do not allow it to come into contact with the skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale tire sealant fumes. Keep the tire sealant away from children. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: # Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin

immediately using water. # If tire sealant gets into your eyes, thor

oughly rinse out the eyes using clean water.

# If tire sealant has been swallowed, immediately rinse out the mouth thor oughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately.

# Change out of any clothes contamina ted with tire sealant immediately.

# If allergic reactions occur, seek medical attention immediately.

* NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla tion compressor running too long

# Do not run the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.

Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tire sealant bottle. Have the tire sealant bottle replaced in a quali fied specialist workshop every five years. # Do not remove any foreign objects which

have entered the tire.

# Remove sticker1 from the tire inflation compressor housing and affix it to the instru ment cluster within the driver's field of vision.

Breakdown assistance 269

# Remove sticker2 from the tire sealant bot tle and affix it near the valve on the wheel with the faulty tire.

# Pull plug7 with the cable and filler hose3 out of the tire inflation compressor housing.

# Insert tire sealant bottle9 in socket6 of the tire inflation compressor in such a way that the red arrow on tire sealant bottle9

matches the red arrow on the tire inflation compressor.

# Turn tire sealant bottle9 a quarter turn clockwise.

# Insert the plug of filler hose3 in socket5 of tire sealant bottle9.

# Turn filler hose3 a quarter turn clockwise.

# Remove the valve cap from valveA on the faulty tire.

# Screw union nut4 of filler hose3 onto valveA.

# Insert plug7 into a 12 V socket in your vehicle.

# Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the igni tion lock.

# Press on and off switch8 on the tire infla tion compressor. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pum ped into the tire. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).

Do not switch off the tire inflation compres sor during this phase! # Let the tire inflation compressor run for a

maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a tire pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).

If tire sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera ble to use clean water. If you get tire sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy lene.

270 Breakdown assistance

If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained: # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the

faulty tire.

Please note that tire sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose. # Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for

approximately 33 ft (10 m). # Pump up the tire again.

After a maximum of ten minutes the tire pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being attained

If the minimum tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired.

# Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire sealant

After use, excess tire sealant may leak out from the filling hose. # Therefore, place the filling hose in the

plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.

If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained: # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the

faulty tire.

Please note that tire sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose.

& WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tires

A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. # Adapt your driving style accordingly and

drive carefully. # Do not exceed the maximum speed

limit with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant.

# Observe the maximum permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant 50 mph (80 km/h).

# The sticker with details of the maximum per missible speed must be affixed to the instru ment cluster where it can be easily seen by the driver.

* NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire sealant

After use, excess tire sealant may leak out from the filling hose.

Breakdown assistance 271

# Therefore, place the filling hose in the plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre sponsible disposal

Tire sealant contains pollutants. # Have the tire sealant bottle disposed of

professionally, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

# Store the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla tion compressor.

# Pull away immediately. # Stop driving after approximately ten minutes

and check the tire pressure using the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being attained

If the specified tire pressure is not reached, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire seal ant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

In cases such as the one mentioned above, con tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). # Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least

130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the Bpillar on the driver's side or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values.

Increasing the tire pressure # Switch on the tire inflation compressor.

Decreasing the tire pressure # Remove the tire sealant bottle from the tire

inflation compressor. # Insert the filler hose in the socket of the tire

inflation compressor and turn it a quarter turn clockwise.

# Press pressure release buttonC next to manometerB.

When the tire pressure is correct # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the

sealed tire.

272 Breakdown assistance

# Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tire.

# Store the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla tion compressor.

# Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work shop and have the tire, tire sealant bottle and filling hose replaced there.

Battery (vehicle) Notes on the 12 V battery

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the bat tery

Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety sys tems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle.

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R When braking R In the event of abrupt steering maneuvers

and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions

# In the event of a short circuit or a simi lar incident, contact a qualified special ist workshop immediately.

# Do not drive on. # Always have work on the battery carried

out at a qualified specialist workshop.

R Further information on ABS (/ page 153) R Further information on ESP (/ page 154) For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tes ted and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes- Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be dam aged in the event of an accident.

& WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec trostatic charge

Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery. # To discharge any electrostatic charge

that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the bat tery.

The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance.

& WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid

Battery acid is caustic. # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or

clothing. # Do not lean over the battery. # Do not inhale battery gases. # Keep children away from the battery.

Breakdown assistance 273

# Immediately rinse battery acid off thor oughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat teries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. #

Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, con tact a qualified specialist workshop.

Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.

Electrolyte or battery acid is corro sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear safety glasses.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

If you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time: R Activate standby mode, or R Connect the battery to a battery charger

approved by Mercedes-Benz, or R Consult a qualified specialist workshop to

disconnect the battery

Notes on starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery

When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connec tion point in the engine compartment.

274 Breakdown assistance

* NOTE Damage to the battery from over voltage

When charging using a battery charger with out a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi

mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

& WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro gen gas igniting

There is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting when charging the battery if there is a short circuit or sparks start to form. # Make sure that the positive terminal of

the connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.

# Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.

# The described order of the battery clamps must be observed when con necting and disconnecting the battery.

# When giving starting assistance, always make sure that you only connect bat tery terminals with identical polarity.

# During starting assistance, you must observe the described order for con necting and disconnecting the jumper cable.

# Do not connect or disconnect the bat tery clamps while the engine is running.

& WARNING Risk of explosion during charging process and starting assistance

During the charging process and starting assistance, the battery may release an explo sive gas mixture. # Avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks

and smoking. # Make sure there is sufficient ventila

tion. # Do not lean over a battery.

& WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro zen battery

A discharged battery may freeze at tempera tures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charg ing, battery gas can be released. # Always allow a battery to thaw before

charging it or performing starting assis tance.

If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has fro zen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. The starting characteristics may be impaired, espe cially at low temperatures. It is recommended that you have a thawed bat tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Breakdown assistance 275

* NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine

Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel. # Avoid numerous and extended attempts

to start the engine.

Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery: R Only use undamaged jumper cables/charg

ing cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps

must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cable/charging cable is connected to the battery/jump-start con nection point. R The jumper cable/charging cable must not

come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running. R Always make sure that neither you nor the

battery is electrostatically charged.

R Keep away from fire and open flames. R Do not lean over the battery.

Observe the additional following points when charging the battery: R Only use battery chargers tested and

approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Read the battery charger's operating instruc

tions before charging the battery.

Observe the additional following points during starting assistance: R For starting assistance, only use batteries

with a nominal voltage of 12 V. R The vehicles must not touch. R Gasoline engines: Only accept starting

assistance if the engine and exhaust system are cold.

Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery

Requirements: R The vehicle is secured with the electric park

ing brake. R Automatic transmission: The transmission

is in positionj. R The ignition and all electrical consumers are

switched off. R The hood is open.

276 Breakdown assistance

# Slide cover1 of positive clamp2 on the jump-starting connection point in the direc tion of the arrow.

# Connect positive clamp2 on your vehicle to the positive pole of the donor battery using the jumper cable/charging cable. Always begin with positive clamp2 on your own vehicle first.

# During starting assistance: start the engine of the donor vehicle and run at idle speed.

# Connect the negative pole of the donor bat tery and ground point3 of your own vehicle by using the jumper cable/charging cable. Begin with the donor battery first.

# During starting assistance: start the engine of your own vehicle.

# During the charging process: start the charging process.

# During starting assistance: let the engines run for several minutes.

# During starting assistance: before discon necting the jumper cable, switch on an elec trical consumer in your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or lighting.

When the starting assistance/charging process is complete: # First, remove the jumper cable/charging

cable from ground point3 and the negative pole of the donor battery, then from positive clamp2 and the positive pole of the donor

battery. Begin each time with the contacts on your own vehicle first.

# After removing the jumper cable/charging cable, close cover1 of positive clamp2.

Further information can be obtained at a quali fied specialist workshop.

Replacing the 12 V battery

# Observe the notes on the 12 V battery (/ page 273).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself: R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery

which meets the specific vehicle require ments. The vehicle is equipped with a fleece battery. Full vehicle functionality is only guaranteed with a fleece battery. For safety reasons,

Breakdown assistance 277

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. R Use detachable parts such as vent hoses,

elbow fittings or terminal covers from the battery which is to be replaced. R Make sure that the vent hose is always con

nected to the original opening on the side of the battery. Install any existing or supplied cell caps. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape. R Make sure that detachable parts are recon

nected in the same way.

Tow starting or towing away Permitted towing methods

Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away. For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar sys tems.

& WARNING Risk of accident when towing with steering wheel lock

You will no longer be able to steer the vehicle if the steering wheel lock is engaged.

# Always switch on the ignition when tow ing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow ing away incorrectly

# Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.

278 Breakdown assistance

Permitted towing methods

Vehicle equipment/towing method

Both axles on the ground Front axle raised Rear axle raised

Vehicles with automatic transmis sion

Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h)

Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h)

Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h)

4MATIC vehicles Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h)

No No

To tow with a raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company.

Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground

# Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods (/ page 278).

# Make sure that the battery is connected and charged.

Observe the following points when the battery is discharged: R The engine cannot be started R The electric parking brake cannot be

released or applied R Vehicles with automatic transmission:

The automatic transmission cannot be shif ted to positioni orj

% Vehicles with automatic transmission: If the automatic transmission cannot be shif

ted to positioni, or the multifunction dis play in the instrument cluster does not show anything, have the vehicle transported away (/ page 281). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transporta tion.

Breakdown assistance 279

* NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long dis tances

The drivetrain could be damaged when tow ing at excessively high speeds or over long distances. # A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h)

must not be exceeded. # A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km)

must not be exceeded.

& WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy

If another vehicle is tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed the permis sible gross mass of your own vehicle, other wise the following could occur: R The towing eye may become detached. R The vehicle/trailer combination may

swerve or even rollover.

# If another vehicle is tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed

the permissible gross mass of your own vehicle.

If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, its permissible gross weight must not exceed the permissible gross weight of the towing vehicle. # Information on the permissible gross mass of

the vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden tification plate (/ page 322).

# Vehicles with automatic transmission: Do not open the driver's door or front passenger door, otherwise the automatic transmission automatically shifts to positionj.

# Install the towing eye (/ page 282). # Fasten the tow bar.

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec tion of the tow bar

# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.

# Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism (/ page 71).

# Do not activate the HOLD function. # Deactivate the tow-away alarm (/ page 85). # Deactivate Active Brake Assist

(/ page 177). # Vehicles with automatic transmission:

Shift the automatic transmission to position i.

# Release the electric parking brake. # Switch on the ignition, otherwise the steering

wheel locking may engage.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to limi ted safety-related functions during the towing process

Safety-related functions are limited or no lon ger available in the following situations: R The ignition is switched off. R The brake system or power steering sys

tem is malfunctioning. R The energy supply or the on-board electri

cal system is malfunctioning.

280 Breakdown assistance

When your vehicle is then towed away, signif icantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required. # Use a tow bar. # Make sure that the steering wheel can

move freely before towing the vehicle away.

* NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power

If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged. # Pull away slowly and smoothly.

Loading the vehicle for transport

# Observe the notes on towing away (/ page 279).

# Connect the tow bar to the towing eye in order to load the vehicle.

# Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift the automatic transmission to position i.

% Vehicles with automatic transmission: The automatic transmission may be locked in positionj in the event of damage to the electrical system. To shift toi, provide the on-board electrical system with power (/ page 276).

# Load the vehicle onto the transporter. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:

Shift the automatic transmission to position j.

# Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.

Vehicles with adaptive damping adjustment

& WARNING Risk of an accident when transporting vehicles with adaptive damping adjustment

When transporting vehicles with adaptive damping adjustment, the vehicle/trailer combination may begin to rock and start to skid. # Load the vehicle correctly onto the

transporter. # Secure the vehicle on all four wheels

with suitable tensioning straps. # Do not exceed the maximum permissi

ble speed of 35 mph (60 km/h) when transporting.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle from secur ing it incorrectly

# After loading, the vehicle must be secured on all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.

Breakdown assistance 281

# A minimum distance of 8 in (20 cm) upwards and 4 in (10 cm) downwards must be kept to the transport platform.

# Secure the vehicle on all four wheels after loading.

4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic transmission

# Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle.

* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due to incorrect positioning

# Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehi cle.

Towing eye storage location

The towing eye is located in the storage space under the trunk floor.

Installing the towing eye

# Press the mark on cover1 inwards and remove.

# Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten.

% Make sure that cover1 engages in the bumper when you remove the towing eye.

282 Breakdown assistance

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye

When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc ess. # Only use the towing eye to tow away or

tow start the vehicle.

Tow starting the vehicle (emergency engine start)

Vehicles with automatic transmission

* NOTE Damage to the automatic trans mission due to tow starting

The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow starting vehicles with automatic transmission. # Vehicles with automatic transmission

must not be tow started.

# Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started.

Electrical fuses Notes on electrical fuses

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines

If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloa ded. This could result in a fire. # Always replace faulty fuses with speci

fied new fuses containing the correct amperage.

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses

Electrical components or systems may be damaged by incorrect fuses, or their func tionality may be significantly impaired. # Only use fuses that have been approved

by Mercedes-Benz and which have the correct fuse rating.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and the labeling. The fuse ratings and fur ther information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram. Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the engine compartment (/ page 284).

* NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture

Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction. # When the fuse box is open, make sure

that no moisture can enter the fuse box.

# When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned cor rectly on the fuse box.

If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified special ist workshop. Ensure the following before replacing a fuse: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away.

Breakdown assistance 283

R All electrical consumers are switched off. R The ignition is switched off.

The electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes: R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the

left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel (/ page 284) R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell

(/ page 285) R Fuse box in the center of the trunk

(/ page 286)

Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine compartment

Requirements: R A dry cloth and a screwdriver are available.

Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 283).

Opening

& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers while the engine hood is open

When the engine hood is open and the wind shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers

and ignition before opening the engine hood.

# Open the hood.

# Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth.

# Loosen screws1. # Press clamps2 and lift the fuse box lid up

and out.

The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on the side of the fuse box.

284 Breakdown assistance

Closing # Check whether the seal is positioned cor

rectly in the lid. # Place the lid on the fuse box. # Make sure that clamps2 engage. # Tighten screws1. # Close the hood.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell

Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 283).

Opening

# Lift carpet1 in the direction of the arrow.

# Loosen screws2 and remove the fuse box lid from the top.

Closing # Place the lid on the fuse box. # Tighten screws2. # Fold back the carpet.

Breakdown assistance 285

Opening and closing the fuse box in the trunk

Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 283). # Open the trunk floor .

Fuse box1 is located in the center underneath the trunk floor.

286 Breakdown assistance

Notes on noise or unusual handling charac teristics Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehi cle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. Hidden tire dam age could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you suspect that a tire is malfunctioning, reduce your speed immediately and have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires

& WARNING Risk of injury through dam aged tires

Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss. # Check the tires regularly for signs of

damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.

& WARNING Risk of hydroplaning due to insufficient tire tread

Insufficient tire tread will result in reduced tire grip. In heavy rain or slush the risk of hydroplaning is increased, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions. # Thus, you should regularly check the

tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires.

Minimum tread depth for: R Summer tires: in (3 mm) R M+S tires:in (4 mm)

# For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.

Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg ularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving off- road: R Check the tire pressure (/ page 288).

R Visually inspect wheels and tires for damage. R Check the valve caps. R Visual check of the tire tread depth and the

tire contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tires is in (3 mm) and for winter tires in (4 mm).

Six marks1 show where the bar indicators (arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They are visible once a tire tread depth of approx imately in (1.6 mm) has been reached.

Wheels and tires 287

Notes on snow chains

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect snow chain fitting

If you fit snow chains to the rear wheels, the snow chains may grind against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. # Never fit snow chains to the rear

wheels. # Always fit snow chains to the front

wheels in pairs.

* NOTE Damage to components of the vehicle body or chassis due to mounted snow chains

If you mount snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage compo nents of the vehicle body or chassis. # Only mount snow chains to the rear

wheels of 4MATIC vehicles.

* NOTE Damage to the wheel trim from mounted snow chains

If snow chains are mounted to steel wheels, the wheel trims can be damaged. # Remove the wheel trims of steel wheels

before mounting snow chains.

Observe the following notes when using snow chains: R Snow chains are only permissible for certain

wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain information about this from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that

have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard. R If snow chains are installed, the maximum

permissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h). R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Do

not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed.

% You can deactivate ESP to pull away (/ page 155). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force.

Tire pressure Notes on tire pressure

& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf ficient or excessive tire pressure

Tires with either too low or too high a pres sure present the following hazards: R the tires could burst R the tires could wear excessively and/or

unevenly R the driving characteristics as well as

steering and braking characteristics may be severely impaired

# Observe the recommended tire pres sures and check the tire pressure of all tires including the spare wheel: R monthly

288 Wheels and tires

R if altering the load on the vehicle R prior to long journeys R if the operating conditions change, for

example when driving off-road

# Adjust the tire pressure where neces sary.

Tire pressure which is too high or too low can: R Shorten the service life of the tires. R Cause increased tire damage. R Adversely affect driving characteristics and

thus driving safety, e.g. due to hydroplaning.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to too low a tire pressure

Tires with pressure that is too low can over heat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the brak ing properties and the handling characteris tics. # Avoid excessively low tire pressure.

Tire pressure which is too low can cause: R Tire faults as a result of overheating R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Increased fuel consumption

& WARNING Risk of accident due to too high a tire pressure

Tires with excessively high pressure can burst. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the brak ing properties and the handling characteris tics. # Avoid excessively high tire pressures.

Tire pressure which is too high can cause: R Increased braking distance R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Impaired driving comfort R Susceptibility to damage

& WARNING Risk of accident due to repea ted pressure drop in the tires

The wheels, valves or tires could be dam aged. Too low a tire pressure can lead to the tires bursting. # Examine the tires for foreign objects. # Check whether the tire has a puncture

or the valve has a leak. # If you are unable to rectify the damage,

contact a qualified specialist workshop.

You can find specifications for the tire pressure for the vehicle's factory-installed tires on the fol lowing labels: R Tire and Loading Information placard on the

Bpillar of your vehicle (/ page 295). R Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel

filler flap (/ page 290).

Observe the maximum tire pressure (/ page 301).

Wheels and tires 289

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. Only correct tire pressure when the tires are cold. Conditions for cold tires: R The vehicle has been parked with the tires

out of direct sunlight for at least three hours. R The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile

(1.6 km).

The vehicle's tires heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tires increases, so too does the tire pressure. Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys tem: You can also see the tire pressure in the driver's display. The tire pressure recommended for increased load/speed in the tire pressure table can affect the ride comfort.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable accessories on tire valves

If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. # Only screw standard valve caps or valve

caps specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve.

Tire pressure table

The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. % The data shown in the images is example

data.

If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure, the following tire pressure information is only valid for those tire sizes and their respective load condition. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different num bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ from this.

290 Wheels and tires

Some tire pressure tables only show the rim diameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire side wall (/ page 302). R Tire and Loading Information placard

(/ page 295) R Maximum tire pressure (/ page 301)

Checking tire pressures manually

# Read the tire pressure for the current operat ing conditions from the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table. Observe the notes on tire pressure.

# Remove the valve cap of the tire to be checked.

# Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve.

# Read the tire pressure. # If the tire pressure is lower than the recom

mended value, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value.

# If the tire pressure is higher than the recom mended value, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, e.g. using the tip of a pen, for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure gauge.

# Screw the valve cap onto the valve. Further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 288)

R Tire pressure table (/ page 290) R Tire and Loading Information placard

(/ page 295)

Tire pressure monitoring system

Function of the tire pressure monitoring sys tem

& DANGER Risk of accident due to incor rect tire pressure

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and then inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for these tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

Wheels and tires 291

pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accord ingly, if the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire main tenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres sure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys tem detects a malfunction, the indicator lamp will flash for approximately a minute

and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumina ted, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea sons, including the installation of incompati ble replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

The system checks the tire pressure and the tire temperature of the tires installed on the vehicle by means of a tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure and the tire temperature appear in the on-board computer (/ page 293).

If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tire temperature is excessive, you will be warned in the following ways: R via display messages (/ page 372). R via theh warning lamp in the instrument

cluster (/ page 392)

The tire pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation. In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring sys tem will automatically update the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. You can, however, also update the reference val ues by restarting the tire pressure monitoring system manually (/ page 392).

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R The tire pressure has been set incorrectly R Sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign

object penetrating the tire, for example

292 Wheels and tires

R There is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source

Checking the tire pressure with the tire pres sure monitoring system

Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.

On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires One of the following displays appears: R Current tire pressure and tire temperature of

the individual wheels:

R Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes R Tire Pressure Monitor Active: the teach-in

process of the system is not yet complete. The tire pressures are already being moni tored.

# Compare the tire pressure with the recom mended tire pressure for the current operat ing condition (/ page 290). Observe the notes on tire temperature (/ page 288).

% The values displayed in the on-board com puter may deviate from those of the tire pressure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high elevations, the tire pressure value indi cated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressure.

Restarting the tire pressure monitoring sys tem

Requirements: R The recommended tire pressure is correctly

set for the respective operating status on all of the wheels (/ page 288).

Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed. R The wheels or tires have been changed or

newly installed.

On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires # Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the

left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Use Current Pressures as New Refer- ence Values message is shown in the multi function display.

# To restart, press Touch Control on the left- hand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message is shown in the multifunction display. Current warning messages are deleted and the yellowh warning lamp goes out. After you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the cur rent tire pressures are within the specified range. The current tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.

Wheels and tires 293

Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 288)

Tire pressure loss warning system

Function of the tire pressure loss warning system The tire pressure loss warning system warns the driver by means of display messages when there is a severe tire pressure loss.

System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R Incorrectly set tire pressure R Sudden pressure loss caused, for example,

by a foreign object penetrating the tire R Steady pressure loss in several tires

The system has a restricted or delayed function particularly in the following situations: R Poor ground conditions, e.g. snow or gravel R Driving with snow chains

R When adopting a very sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or sudden accel eration R Driving with a high load

The tire pressure loss warning system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation and to check it. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 288) R Display messages about the tires

(/ page 372)

Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system

Requirements: R The recommended tire pressure is correctly

set for the respective operating status on all wheels.

Restart the tire pressure loss warning system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed. R The wheels or tires have been changed or

newly installed.

On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires # Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the

left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Pressure Control System Active Restart message is shown in the multifunc tion display.

# To begin restart, press Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Pressure Now OK? message is shown in the multifunction display.

# Select Yes. # To confirm restart, press Touch Control on

the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message is shown in the multifunction display.

294 Wheels and tires

After you have driven for a few minutes, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set tire pressure of all the tires.

Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 288)

Loading the vehicle Notes on Tire and Loading Information plac ard

& WARNING Risk of accident from overloa ded tires

Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a consequence. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and handling characteris tics and lead to brake failure. # Observe the load rating of the tires. # The load rating must be at least half the

permissible axle load of the vehicle. # Never overload the tires by exceeding

the maximum load.

The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.

1 Tire and Loading Information placard

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the following information: R Maximum number of seats2 according to

the maximum number of people permitted to travel in the vehicle.

Wheels and tires 295

R Maximum permissible load3 comprises the gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage. R Recommended tire pressure1 for cold

tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed.

Please also note: R Information on permissible weights and loads

on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 322). R Information on tire pressure in the tire pres

sure table (/ page 290).

Further related subjects: R Determining the maximum permissible load

(/ page 296) R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 288).

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49,

Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575, pur suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". # (1): Locate the statement The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicle's placard.

# (2): Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

# (3): Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

# (4): The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb pas sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa ble cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

# (5): Determine the combined weight of lug gage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the availa

ble cargo and luggage load capacity calcula ted in Step 4.

# (6): If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to deter mine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

% Not all vehicles are permitted to tow a trailer. Towing a trailer is only permitted if a trailer-hitch is installed. Please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer if you have any questions about towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Even if you have calculated the total load care fully, you should still make sure that the maxi mum permissible gross weight and the maxi mum gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehi cle identification plate.

296 Wheels and tires

# Have your loaded vehicle including driver, occupants and load weighed on a vehicle weighbridge. The measured values may not exceed the maximum permissible values stated on the vehicle identification plate.

Further related subjects: R Calculation example for determining the max

imum load (/ page 297)

R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 295) R Tire pressure table (/ page 290) R Vehicle identification plate (/ page 322)

Calculation example for determining the maximum load

The following table shows examples of how to calculate total and load capacities with varying

seating configurations and different numbers and sizes of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehi cle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 295). The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage.

Step 1

Example 1 Example 2

Combined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Wheels and tires 297

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2

Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants)

5 1

Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3

Front: 1

Weight of occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg)

Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg)

Total weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2

Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs (589 kg)

298 Wheels and tires

Tire labeling Overview of tire labeling

1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (/ page 299)

2 DOT (Department of Transportation), (TIN) Tire Identification Number (/ page 300)

3 Maximum tire load (/ page 301) 4 Maximum tire pressure (/ page 301)

5 Manufacturer 6 Characteristics of the tire (/ page 302) 7 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,

speed rating and load index (/ page 302) 8 Tire name

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

Tire Quality Grading

In accordance with the US Department of Trans portation's "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand ards", tire manufacturers are required to grade their tires on the basis of the following three per formance factors:

1 Tread wear grade 2 Traction grade 3 Temperature grade

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

% The classification is not legally stipulated for Canada, but it is generally stated.

Tread wear grade The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1\1/2) times

Wheels and tires 299

as well on the government course as a tire gra ded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate conditions.

Traction grade

& DANGER Risk of accident due to inade quate traction

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests. # Always adapt your driving style and

drive at a speed to suit the prevailing traffic and weather conditions.

* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from wheelspin

# Avoid wheelspin.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified govern ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perform ance.

Temperature grade

& WARNING Risk of accident from tire overheating and tire failure

Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possi ble tire failure. # Observe the recommended tire pres

sure. # Regularly check the pressure of all the

tires. # Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate

heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus tained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the side wall of each tire produced.

300 Wheels and tires

% The data shown in the image is example data.

The TIN is a unique identification number to identify tires and comprises the following: R DOT (Department of Transportation): tire

symbol marks1 indicating that the tire complies with the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. R Manufacturer identification code: manu

facturer identification code2 contains details of the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. Further information on retreaded tires (/ page 307).

R Tire size: identifier3 describes the tire size. R Tire type code: tire type code4 can be

used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. R Manufacturing date: manufacturing date 5 provides information about the age of a tire. The 1st and 2nd positions represent the calendar week and the 3rd and 4th positions state the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208" represents the 32nd week of 2008).

Information on the maximum tire load

% The data shown in the image is example data.

Maximum tire load1 is the maximum permissi ble weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the speci fied load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driv er's side (/ page 295).

Specifications for maximum tire pressure

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

Wheels and tires 301

Never exceed maximum tire pressure1 speci fied for the tire. Always observe the recommen ded tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (/ page 290).

Information on tire characteristics

% The data shown in the image is example data.

This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in side wall1 and under tire tread2.

Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index

& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed ing the specified tire load-bearing capa city or the permissible speed rating

Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes

approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed

rating required for your vehicle.

1 First letter(s) 2 Nominal tire width in millimeters 3 Aspect ratio in % 4 Tire code 5 Rim diameter 6 Load-bearing index 7 Speed rating 8 Load index

% The data shown in the illustration is example data.

Information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.

302 Wheels and tires

First letter(s)1: R Without: passenger vehicle tires according to

European manufacturing standards. R "P": passenger vehicle tires according to US

manufacturing standards. R "LT": light truck tires according to US manu

facturing standards. R "T": compact emergency spare wheels with

high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency.

Aspect ratio3: Ratio between tire height and tire width in per cent (tire height divided by tire width).

Tire code4 (tire type): R "R" radial tire R "D": bias ply tire R "B": bias belted tires R "ZR": radial tire with a maximum speed above

149 mph (240 km/h) (optional)

Rim diameter5: The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter of the rim flange). The rim diameter is specified in inches (in).

Load-bearing index6: Numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire (e.g. "91" corre sponds to 1356 lbs (615 kg)). The load-bearing capacity of the tire must be at least half the gross axle weight rating of your vehicle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. See also: R Maximum permissible load on the Tire and

Loading Information placard (/ page 295) R Maximum tire load (/ page 301) R Load index

Speed rating7: Specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire.

% An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h).

Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating. You can obtain information on the required speed rating from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

Wheels and tires 303

Index Speed rating

ZR...Y1 up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y)1 over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR1 over 149 mph (240 km/h)

R Specifying the speed rating as the "ZR" index in tire code4 is optional for tires up to 186 mph (300 km/h). R If your tire code4 includes "ZR" and there

is no speed rating7, find out what the max imum speed is from the tire manufacturer. R If load-bearing index6 and speed rating7

are in brackets, the maximum speed rating of your tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). To find out the maximum speed, ask the tire manufacturer.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S2 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S2 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S2 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S2 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

Winter tires bear thei snowflake symbol and fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manu facturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow.

Load index8: R No specification given: standard load (SL)

tire R "XL" or "Extra Load": extra load tire or rein

forced tire R "Light Load": light load tire

R "C", "D", "E": a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure

Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire structure and characteristics: describes the number of layers or the number of rubber- coated belts in the tire contact surface and the tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, poly ester and other materials. Bar: metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of one bar. DOT (Department of Transportation): DOT- marked tires fulfill the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. Average weight of the vehicle occupants: the number of vehicle occupants for which the vehi cle is designed, multiplied by 150 lb (68 kg).

1 "ZR" stated in the tire code. 2 Or "M+Si" for winter tires.

304 Wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regard to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer follow ing specifications from the U.S. government. The quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the side wall of the tire. Recommended tire pressure: the recommen ded tire pressure is the tire pressure specified for the tires mounted to the vehicle at the fac tory. The tire and information table contains the rec ommended tire pressures for cold tires, the max imum permissible load and the maximum per missible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommen ded tire pressures for cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment: the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle,

regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is installed. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): the GAWR is the maximum permissible axle load. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side. Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which a tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the gross vehicle weight comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accesso ries installed, occupants, luggage and the trailer drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight

of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, lug gage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if appli cable). The gross vehicle weight rating is speci fied on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side. Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the maximum weight is the sum of the curb weight of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the maximum load and the weight of optional equip ment installed at the factory. Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) equals 1 bar. Load index: in addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the side wall of the tire. This specifies the load- bearing capacity of the tire more precisely. Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with stand ard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air conditioning system and optional equipment if

Wheels and tires 305

these are installed on the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure: maxi mum permissible tire pressure for one tire. Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maxi mum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of measurement for tire pressure. Aspect ratio: ratio between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure: pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to every square inch of the tire. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Cold tire pressure: the tires are cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours

without direct sunlight on the tires or the vehicle has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead to prevent the tire from changing length on the wheel rim. Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread and the tire bead. Weight of optional equipment: the combined weight of the optional equipment weighing more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). This optional equipment, such as high-performance brakes, level control system, a roof luggage rack or high-performance batteries, is not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identification Number): a unique identification number which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example, in a product recall, and thus identify the pur chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur

er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index is a code that contains the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Traction: traction is the grip resulting from fric tion between the tires and the road surface. Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire contact surface. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution of vehicle occupants over designated seat posi tions in a vehicle. Maximum permissible payload weight: nomi nal load and luggage load plus 150 lb (68 kg) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle.

306 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel Notes on selecting, installing and replacing tires

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect dimensions of wheels and tires

If wheels and tires of the wrong size are installed, the wheel brakes or wheel suspen sion components may be damaged. # Always replace wheels and tires with

those that fulfill the specifications of the original part.

When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct: R Designation R Model

When replacing tires, make sure to install the correct: R Designation R Manufacturer R Model

& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed ing the specified tire load-bearing capa city or the permissible speed rating

Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes

approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed

rating required for your vehicle.

* NOTE Vehicle and tire damage through tire types and sizes that have not been approved

For safety reasons, only use tires, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. These tires are specially adapted to the con trol systems, such as ABS, ESP and 4MATIC, and marked as follows: R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended

(run-flat tire only for certain wheels) R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer

tain AMG tires)

Certain characteristics, such as handling, vehicle noise emissions, consumption, etc. may otherwise be adversely affected. Fur thermore, other tire sizes could result in the tires rubbing against the body and axle com ponents when loaded. This could result in damage to the tire or the vehicle.

Wheels and tires 307

Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

* NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea ded tires

Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recom mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. For this reason driving safety cannot be guar anteed. # Do not use used tires if you have no

information about their previous usage.

* NOTE Possible damage to wheels or tires when driving over obstacles

Large wheels have a lower tire section width. The lower the tire section width, the greater is the risk of damage to wheels or tires when driving over obstacles.

# Avoid obstacles or drive particularly carefully.

* NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage when parking on curbs or in potholes

Parking on curbs or in potholes may damage the wheels and tires. # If possible, park only on flat surfaces. # Avoid curbs and potholes when parking.

* NOTE Damage to electronic component parts from the use of tire-mounting tools

Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: Electronic component parts are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used in the area of the valve. This could otherwise damage the electronic component parts. # Have the tires changed at a qualified

specialist workshop only.

* NOTE Damage to summer tires at low ambient temperatures

At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tires, caus ing permanent damage to the tire. # At temperatures below 45 F (7 C) use

i M+S- tires.

Accessory parts that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: R Suitability R Legal stipulations R Factory recommendations

& WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tires

The special tire tread in combination with the optimized tire compound means that the risk

308 Wheels and tires

of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is increased. In addition, the tire grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tire running temperature. # Switch on the ESP and adapt your

driving style accordingly. # Usei M+S tires at outside temper

atures of less than 50 F (10 C). # Only use the tires for their intended pur

pose.

Observe the following when selecting, installing and replacing tires: R Furthermore, the use of certain tire types in

certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial. R Only use tires and wheels of the same type

(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) and the same make. R Only install wheels of the same size on one

axle (left and right).

It is only permissible to install a different wheel size in the event of a flat tire in order to drive to the specialist workshop. R Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring

system: All installed wheels must be equip ped with functioning sensors for the tire pressure monitoring system. R At temperatures below 45 F (7 C) use win

ter tires or all-season tires markedi M+S for all wheels. Winter tires provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. R For M+S tires, only use tires with the same

tread. R Observe the maximum permissible speed for

the M+S tires installed. If the tire's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision. R Break in new tires at moderate speeds for

the first 60 miles (100 km).

R Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. R When replacing with tires that do not fea

ture run-flat characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires.

For more information on wheels and tires, con tact a qualified specialist workshop. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 288) R Tire and Loading Information placard

(/ page 295) R Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,

speed rating and load index (/ page 302) R Tire pressure table (/ page 290) R Notes on the emergency spare wheel

(/ page 317)

Wheels and tires 309

Notes on rotating wheels

& WARNING Risk of injury through differ ent wheel sizes

Rotating the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving characteristics. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. # Rotate front and rear wheels only if the

wheels and tires are of the same dimen sions.

The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels differ: R Front wheels wear more on the tire shoulder R Rear wheels wear more in the center of the

tire

Do not drive with tires that have too little tread depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty

book in your vehicle documents. If this is not available, rotate the tires every 3000 to 6000 miles (5000 to 10,000 km), depending on the wear. Ensure that the direction of rotation is maintained. Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" when doing so (/ page 311).

Notes on storing wheels

When storing wheels, observe the following notes: R After removing wheels, store them in a cool,

dry and preferably dark place. R Protect the tires from contact with oil, grease

or fuel.

Overview of the tire-change tool kit

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi cles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. For more information on which tire-changing tools are required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. You require the following tools, for example, to change a wheel: R Jack R Chock R Lug wrench R Alignment bolt

The tire-change tool kit is located in tool bag1 in the trunk.

310 Wheels and tires

% Depending on the vehicle equipment, the tool bag may be located at other positions in the trunk.

The tool bag contains: R Jack R Gloves R Lug wrench R Alignment bolt R Folding chock R Ratchet for jack

Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change

Requirements: R The required tire-change tool kit is available.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the tire- change tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools. R The vehicle is not on a slope. R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level

ground.

# Apply the electric parking brake manually. # Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead

position. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:

Shift into positionj. # Switch off the engine. # Make sure that the engine cannot be started. # Place chocks or other suitable items under

the front and rear of the wheel that is diago nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

# If necessary, remove the wheel trim/hub caps (/ page 311).

# Raise the vehicle (/ page 312).

Removing and installing the wheel trim/hub caps

Requirements: R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change

(/ page 311).

Wheel trim The wheel trim covers the wheel bolts on vehi cles with steel wheels. Before unscrewing the wheel bolts, remove the wheel trim.

# To remove: using both hands, carefully reach into two wheel trim openings and remove the wheel trim.

Wheels and tires 311

Plastic hub cap # To remove: turn the center cover of the hub

cap counter-clockwise and remove the hub cap.

# To install: make sure that the center cover of the hub cap is turned counter-clockwise.

# Position the hub cap and turn the center cover clockwise until the hub cap engages physically and audibly.

Aluminum hub cap

# To remove: position socket2 from the tire- change tool kit on hub cap1.

# Position wheel wrench3 on socket2. # Using wheel wrench3, turn hub cap1

counter-clockwise and remove it. # To install: follow the instructions above in

reverse order. % Specified tightening torque: 18 lb-ft

(25 Nm).

Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel

Requirements: R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel

change (/ page 311). R The wheel trims and hub caps have been

removed (/ page 311).

Important notes on using the jack: R Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has

been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. R The jack is only designed for raising and

holding the vehicle for a short time while a

wheel is being changed and not for mainte nance work under the vehicle. R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and

non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, flat, load-bearing, non-slip underlay. R The foot of the jack must be positioned verti

cally under the jack support point.

Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised: R Never place your hands or feet under the

vehicle. R Never lie under the vehicle. R Do not start the engine and do not release

the electric parking brake.

312 Wheels and tires

R Do not open or close any doors or the trunk lid.

# Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com pletely.

Position of jack support points

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack

If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.

# Only position the jack at the appropri ate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle.

* NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack

If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jack support point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi cle raised. # The jack is designed exclusively for

jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup port points.

# Take the ratchet out of the tire-change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible.

Wheels and tires 313

# Position support2 of jack4 on jack sup port point1.

% If there is a total loss of pressure in a tire, it may be possible that the jack cannot be positioned at jack support point1. In this case, unload the vehicle.

# Turn ratchet3 clockwise until support2 sits completely on jack support point1 and

the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

# Turn ratchet3 until the tire is raised a maxi mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

# Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 314).

Removing a wheel

Requirements: R The vehicle is raised (/ page 312).

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, as this could impair the level of comfort when braking.

* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts

# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface.

# Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com pletely.

# Screw alignment bolt1 into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.

# Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts com pletely.

314 Wheels and tires

# Remove the wheel and, if necessary, store it in the trunk.

# Notes on removing an emergency spare wheel (/ page 317).

Installing a new wheel

Requirements: R The wheel is removed (/ page 314).

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel

Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/ wheel nuts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driv ing.

# Never oil or grease the threads. # In the event of damage to the threads,

contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

# Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam aged hub threads replaced.

# Do not continue driving.

# Observe the information on the choice of tires (/ page 307).

For tires with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tire indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direc tion of rotation when installing. # Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the

alignment bolt and push it on. # Observe the notes on installing an emer

gency spare wheel (/ page 317).

& WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts

If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts

when the vehicle is on the ground.

# Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (/ page 307).

# For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by Mercedes- Benz and for the wheel in question.

* NOTE Damage to paintwork of the wheel rim when screwing on the first wheel bolt

If the wheel has too much play when screw ing in the first wheel bolt, the wheel rim paint can be damaged. # Press the wheel firmly against the

wheel hub when screwing on the first wheel bolt.

Wheels and tires 315

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are finger-tight.

# Unscrew and remove the alignment bolt. # Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-

tight. # Lower the vehicle (/ page 316).

Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change

Requirements: R The new wheel has been installed

(/ page 315).

# To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the let ters "AB" are visible and turn counter-clock wise.

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated1 to5 with an initial maximum force of 59 lb-ft (80 Nm).

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated1 to5 to the specified tightening torque of 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect tightening torque

The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed torque.

# Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque.

# If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the tightening tor que checked immediately.

# Check the tire pressure of the newly installed wheel and adjust it if necessary.

# Vehicles with tire pressure loss warning system: Restart the tire pressure loss warn ing system (/ page 294). Exception: the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.

# Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: Restart the tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 293). Exception: the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.

316 Wheels and tires

Emergency spare wheel Notes on the emergency spare wheel

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tire dimensions

The wheel or tire size and the tire type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle. To prevent hazardous situations: # Adapt your driving style accordingly and

drive carefully. # Never install more than one emergency

spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size.

# Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size briefly.

# Do not switch off ESP. # Have the emergency spare wheel or

spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist work

shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions.

% The emergency spare wheel is secured in the emergency spare wheel bag in the trunk.

Observe the following notes on removing an emergency spare wheel: R Before storing the emergency spare wheel,

make sure there is no air left in the tire. If necessary, allow the air to escape. R To release air from the tire: remove the

valve cap of the tire. R Press down the metal insert in the valve

using a pointed object, e.g. a pen. R Screw the valve cap onto the valve.

Observe the following notes on installing an emergency spare wheel: R Check the tire pressure of the emergency

spare wheel installed. Correct the pressure as necessary.

R The maximum permissible speed with an emergency spare wheel installed is 50 mph (80 km/h). R Do not equip the emergency spare wheel

with snow chains. R Replace the emergency spare wheel after six

years at the latest, regardless of wear.

% Vehicles with a tire pressure loss warn ing system: If an emergency spare wheel is installed the tire pressure loss warning sys tem cannot function reliably. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: If an emergency spare wheel is installed the tire pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is installed, the system may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the sys tem again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.

Wheels and tires 317

Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 288) R Tire and Loading Information placard

(/ page 295) R Tire pressure table (/ page 290) R Notes on installing tires (/ page 307)

Inflating the emergency spare wheel

* NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla tion compressor running too long

# Do not run the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.

Requirements: Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker of the emergency spare wheel and on the tire inflation compressor. # Remove the sticker with the label 50 mph

(80 km/h) from the tire inflation compressor

housing and affix it to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.

# Remove the tire inflation compressor from the storage well under the trunk floor (/ page 268).

# Pull filler hose1 and plug3 out of the tire inflation compressor housing.

# Insert plug7 of filler hose1 in the socket on the tire inflation compressor and then turn it until plug7 engages.

# Unscrew the cap from the valve on the emer gency spare wheel.

# Screw union nut2 of filler hose1 onto valve.

# Make sure on and off switch4 of the tire inflation compressor is set to 0.

# Insert plug3 in a socket in your vehicle. R 12 V socket (/ page 105)

R Observe the notes on sockets (/ page 105).

# Press the start/stop button once to switch on the power supply (/ page 125).

# Press on and off switch4 on the tire infla tion compressor to I. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is shown on manometer5.

# Pump the tire to the specified tire pressure.

% The specified tire pressure is stated on the label of the emergency spare wheel.

# When the specified tire pressure has been reached, press on and off switch4 on the tire inflation compressor to 0. The tire inflation compressor is switched off.

318 Wheels and tires

# Press the start/stop button to switch off the power supply.

# If the tire pressure is higher than the speci fied pressure, press pressure release valve button6 until the correct tire pressure has been reached.

# Unscrew union nut2 of filler hose1 from the valve.

# Screw the valve cap of the emergency spare wheel onto the valve again.

# Store filler hose1 and plug3 in the lower section of the tire inflation compressor hous ing.

# Store the tire inflation compressor in the vehicle.

Wheels and tires 319

Notes on technical data

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Vehicle electronics Two-way radios

Notes on installing two-way radios

& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios

If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofit ted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle.

# You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios

If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in the following situations, in partic ular: R The two-way radio is not connected to an

exterior antenna. R The exterior antenna is installed incor

rectly or is not a low-reflection antenna.

This could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # Have the low-reflection exterior

antenna installed at a qualified special ist workshop.

# When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior antenna.

* NOTE Invalidation of the operating per mit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use

The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. # Only use approved frequency bands. # Observe the maximum permissible out

put power in these frequency bands. # Only use approved antenna positions.

320 Technical data

1 Front roof area 2 Rear roof area 3 Rear fenders 4 Trunk lid

On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, installing an antenna to the front or rear roof area is not permitted.

On the rear fenders, it is recommended that you install the antenna on the side of the vehicle closest to the center of the road. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles "EMCs for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. If your vehicle has installing for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and antenna connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when installing.

Two-way radio transmission output The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the values in the following table.

Frequency band and maximum transmission output

Frequency band Maximum transmis sion output

Short wave 3 - 54 MHz

(100 W)

4 m frequency band 74 - 88 MHz

(30 W)

2 m frequency band 144 - 174 MHz

(50 W)

Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) 380 - 460 MHz

(10 W)

70 cm frequency band 420 - 450 MHz

(35 W)

Two-way radio (2G/3G/4G)

(10 W)

Technical data 321

The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: R Two-way radios with a maximum transmis

sion output of up to 100 mW R RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies

in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (TETRA) R Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)

There are no restrictions when positioning the antenna on the outside of the vehicle for some wavebands. R Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) R 70 cm frequency band R 2G/3G/4G

Radio operating permits for vehicle compo nents Manufacturer information about wireless vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Radio operating permits" in the Digital Opera

tor's Manual in the vehicle, on the Internet and in the app.

Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview

Vehicle identification plate

Vehicle identification plate (USA only) 1 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 2 Maximum permissible front axle load 3 Maximum permissible rear axle load 4 Paint code 5 VIN (vehicle identification number)

322 Technical data

Vehicle identification plate (Canada only) 1 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 2 Maximum permissible front axle load 3 Maximum permissible rear axle load 4 Paint code 5 VIN (vehicle identification number)

The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the load. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried on one axle (front or rear axle).

Do not exceed the maximum gross vehicle weight or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.

VIN, engine number and other signs

1 Engine number stamped into the crankcase 2 VIN (vehicle identification number) stamped

into the crossmember

3 Plate with information about emissions test ing, including confirmation of emissions guidelines at the U.S. federal level as well as for California

4 VIN as a label at the lower edge of the wind shield

Operating fluids Notes on operating fluids

* NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of injury from operating fluids harmful to your health

Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm ful to your health. # Observe the text on the original con

tainers when using, storing or disposing of operating fluids.

Technical data 323

# Always store operating fluids sealed in their original containers.

# Always keep children away from operat ing fluids.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre sponsible disposal

# Dispose of operating fluids in an envi ronmentally responsible manner.

Operating fluids include the following: R Fuels R Lubricants R Coolant R Brake fluid R Windshield washer fluid R Climate control system refrigerant

Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures.

The operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by the following inscriptions on the container: R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)

Further information on approved operating flu ids: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for

Operating Fluids by entering the designation - At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a qualified specialist workshop

& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel

Fuels are highly flammable. # Fire, open flames, smoking and creation

of sparks must be avoided. # Switch off the ignition and, if available,

the stationary heater, before and while refueling the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels

Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into

contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during

the refueling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with

soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your

eyes, immediately rinse them thor oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.

# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten tion immediately. Do not induce vomit ing.

324 Technical data

# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.

Fuel

Notes on fuel grades for vehicles with a gas oline engine Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 323).

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur gasoline.

This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel

R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by

volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal

If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sul fur, this can produce unpleasant odors. Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number specified in the information label in the fuel filler flap (/ page 142). If you want maximum engine output: only refuel with unleaded premium grade gasoline with an octane number of at least 91 AKI/ 95 RON. As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also refuel with unleaded regular gasoline with at least 87 AKI/

91 RON. This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption. Never refuel using gasoline with an even lower RON.

* NOTE Premature engine wear through unleaded regular gasoline

Impairment of the longevity and performance of the engine. If unleaded premium grade gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel using unleaded regular gasoline: # Only fill the fuel tank to half full with

unleaded regular gasoline and refill as soon as possible with unleaded pre mium grade gasoline.

# Do not drive at the maximum design speed.

# Avoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3000 rpm.

Technical data 325

Further information on fuel is available at the fol lowing locations: R At a gas station R At a qualified specialist workshop R On the https://www.mbusa.com (USA only)

Notes on additives in gasoline Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 323).

* NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives

Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring. # Only add cleaning additives recommen

ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brand-name fuels with additives. In some countries, the fuel available may not have sufficient additives. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, mix the fuel with the

cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes- Benz. Observe the notes and mixing ratios indi cated on the tank.

Tank content and reserve fuel

Model Total capacity

All models 13.5 gal (51.0 liters)

Model Of which reserve

All models 1.3 gal (5.0 liters)

Engine oil

Notes on engine oil Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 323).

* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi tives

# Do not use engine oils or oil filters other than those which meet the specifica tions necessary for the prescribed service intervals.

# Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.

# Do not use additives. # Have the engine oil changed after the

prescribed intervals.

326 Technical data

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Quality and capacity of engine oil

Gasoline engines MB-Freigabe or MB- Approval

All models 229.71*

* Recommended for lowest possible fuel con sumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes). To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil specifi cations marked in the table for the lowest SAE viscosity class. Possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes must be observed. The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter.

Model Capacity

All models 5.8 US qt (5.5 liters)

Notes on brake fluid

Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 323).

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapor pockets forming in the brake sys tem

The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This causes the braking effect to be impaired. # Have the brake fluid renewed at the

specified intervals.

Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Only use a brake fluid approved by Mercedes- Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.

Coolant

Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 323).

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from antifreeze

If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart ment, it may ignite. # Allow the engine to cool down before

adding antifreeze. # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out

next to the filler opening. # Thoroughly clean off any antifreeze

from component parts before starting the vehicle.

Technical data 327

* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool ant

# Only use coolant that has been pre mixed with the required antifreeze pro tection.

Information on coolant is available at the fol lowing locations: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for

Operating Fluids 310.1 - At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a qualified specialist workshop

* NOTE Overheating at high outside tem peratures

If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro tected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures. # Always use coolant approved by

Mercedes-Benz.

# Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper ating Fluids 310.1.

Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the engine cooling system: R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection

down to approximately -35F (-37C)) R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection

down to -49F (-45C))

Coolant capacity

Model Capacity

All models 9.4 US qt (8.9 liters)

Notes on windshield washer fluid

Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 323).

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate

Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer

concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.

* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid

Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may dam age the plastic surface of the exterior light ing. # Only use windshield washer fluid which

is also suitable for use on plastic surfa ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB Winter Fit.

328 Technical data

* NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windshield washer fluids

# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win terFit with other windshield washer flu ids.

Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other wise, the fill level sensor may be triggered erro neously. Recommended windshield washer fluid: R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit

For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa tion on the antifreeze container. Mix washer fluid with windshield washer fluid all year round.

Refrigerant

Notes on refrigerant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 323).

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect refriger ant

If a non-approved refrigerant is used, the cli mate control system may be damaged. # USA/China: Use only R134a refriger

ant. # Canada: Use only R1234yf refrigerant.

* NOTE Damage to the climate control system due to incorrect refrigerant com pressor oil

# Only use refrigerant compressor oil that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

# Do not mix the approved refrigerant compressor oil with a different refriger ant compressor oil.

Work on the climate control system may be car ried out only by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE stand ard J639, must be adhered to. The information label for the climate control sys tem regarding the refrigerant type and the refrig

erant compressor oil (PAG oil) is located on the inside of the hood.

Information label (example USA/China) 1 Hazard and service warning symbols 2 Refrigerant filling capacity 3 Applicable standards 4 PAG oil part number 5 GWP (global warming potential) of the refrig

erant used 6 Refrigerant type

Technical data 329

Information label (example Canada) 1 Hazard and service warning symbols 2 Refrigerant filling capacity 3 Applicable standards 4 PAG oil part number 5 GWP (global warming potential) of the refrig

erant used 6 Refrigerant type

Symbols1 indicate the following: R Possible dangers R The need to have service work carried out at

a qualified specialist workshop only

Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil

Model Refrigerant

All models 24.3 0.4 oz (690 10 g)

Model PAG oil

All models 2.8 0.4 oz (80 10 g)

Vehicle data Vehicle dimensions

The heights specified may vary as a result of the following factors: R Tires R Load R Condition of the suspension R Optional equipment

330 Technical data

Height when opened

Model 1 Height when opened

Canada only: A 220 4MATIC 67.4 in (1713 mm)

All other models 68.1 in (1729 mm)

Vehicle dimensions

All models

Vehicle length 179.1 in (4549 mm)

Vehicle width including out side mirrors

78.4 in (1992 mm)

Wheelbase 107.4 in (2729 mm)

Turning radius 36.1 ft (11.0 m)

Vehicle height

Model Vehicle height

Canada only: A 220 4MATIC 56.5 in (1434 mm)

All other models 57.1 in (1451 mm)

Weights and loads

Please observe the following notes for the speci fied vehicle data: R Items of optional equipment increase the

curb weight and reduce the payload.

Model Maximum roof load

All models 165 lb (75 kg)

Technical data 331

Display messages Introduction

Information about display messages Display messages appear on the multifunction display. Display messages with graphical symbols are simplified in the Operator's Manual and may dif fer from the symbols on the multifunction dis play. The multifunction display shows high-prior ity display messages in red. Certain display mes sages are accompanied by a warning tone. Please act in accordance with the display mes sages and follow the additional notes in the Operator's Manual. For some display messages, a symbol will also be shown: R Further information R Hide display message

With the left-hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the left or right. Press the symbol to show further infor

mation on the media display. Press the symbol to hide the display message. You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing theP back button or the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hid den. The multifunction display shows these dis play messages continuously until the cause of the display message has been rectified.

Calling up saved display messages On-board computer: 4 Service 5 1 Message If there are no display messages, No Messages will appear on the multifunction display. # Scroll through the display messages by swip

ing upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.

# To exit the message memory: press the back buttonP.

332 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Occupant safety

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

6 SRS Malfunction Service Required

* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 37).

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example)

* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 37).

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required (example)

* The corresponding window curtain airbag is malfunctioning (/ page 37).

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the window curtain airbag

The window curtain airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. # Have the window curtain airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 333

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Front Passenger Airbag Dis- abled See Operator's Man- ual

* The front passenger airbag and the front passenger knee airbag have been disabled even though an adult or a per son of adult stature is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the sys tem detects may be too low.

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a disabled front passenger airbag

If the front passenger airbag is disabled, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an acci dent and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. # Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. # Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 47). # If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual

* The front passenger airbag and the front passenger knee airbag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations: R Even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the

front passenger seat R Even when the front passenger seat is not occupied

334 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. # Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 47). # If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* The PRESAFE functions are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 335

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Obtain a New Key

* Have SmartKey replaced. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Replace Key Battery

* The SmartKey battery is discharged. # Replace the battery (/ page 68).

Key Not Detected (white display message)

* The SmartKey is currently undetected. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # If the SmartKey is still not recognized, place it in the marked space for starting with the SmartKey

(/ page 127).

336 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Key Not Detected (red dis play message)

* The SmartKey cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle. The SmartKey is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine: R You can no longer start the engine. R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.

# Ensure that the SmartKey is in the vehicle.

If the SmartKey detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source: # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 127).

Don't Forget Your Key

* A warning tone also sounds. This message reminds you to take your SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

Place the Key in the Marked Space See Opera- tor's Manual

* SmartKey detection is malfunctioning. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 127).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 337

Lights

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

: Check Left Low Beam (example)

* The corresponding light source is faulty. # Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. % LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting

diodes in the light are faulty.

: Malfunction See Opera- tors Manual

* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

: Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative

* The light sensor is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

338 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

: Active Headlamps Inopera- tive

* The active headlamps are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

: Switch On Headlamps

* You are driving without low-beam headlamps. # Turn the light switch to the L or position.

: Switch Off Lights

* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. # Turn the light switch to the position.

: Intell. Light System Inoper- ative

* The Intelligent Light System is malfunctioning. The lighting system continues to function properly without the func tions of the Intelligent Light System. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 339

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 112). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available display message will appear. # Drive on. # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunctioning

* The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

340 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting

* You are leaving the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state. # When you leave the vehicle, switch off the ignition, secure the vehicle against rolling away and take the Smart

Key with you. # If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12 V

battery may discharge and it will then be possible to start the vehicle only with the aid of a second battery (starting assistance).

Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual

* The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics

If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer. # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Opera- tor's Manual

* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired

If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 341

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Steering Malfunction See Operator's Manual

* The electric steering lock is malfunctioning. The steering may be locked by the electric steering lock.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired

If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not con tinue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Before Starting the Engine, Turn Steering Wheel

* The electric steering lock could not unlock the steering. # Switch off the ignition. # To unlock the steering, move the steering wheel slightly to the left and right. # Switch the ignition back on.

342 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

C * At least one door is open. # Close all doors.

M * The hood is open.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked

The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Close the hood.

N * The trunk lid is open.

& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 343

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Close the trunk lid.

Check Washer Fluid

* The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. # Add washer fluid (/ page 256).

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

To switch engine off, press and hold Start/Stop but- ton for at least 3 seconds or press 3 times.

* You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion. # Information about switching off the engine while driving (/ page 126).

+ Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual

* The coolant level is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.

# Add coolant (/ page 255).

344 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehi- cle Turn Engine Off

* The coolant is too hot. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

& WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood

If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.

# Wait until the engine has cooled down. # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that

the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.

* The fan motor is faulty. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that

the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 345

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Fuel Level Low

* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel.

Gas Cap Loose

* The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. # Close the fuel filler cap. # If the fuel filler cap was already properly closed: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Only Shift to 'P' when Vehi- cle is Stationary

* It is possible to select the park positionj only if the vehicle is stationary. # To stop, depress the brake pedal. # Shift the transmission to park positionj when the vehicle is stationary.

Apply Brake to Shift from 'P'

* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park positionj and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission positionh,k or neutrali.

346 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine

* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park positionj or neutrali and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Start the engine. # Change the transmission position.

Apply Brake to Shift to D or R

* You have attempted to select transmission positionh ork. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission positionh ork.

Apply Brake to Shift to 'R' * You have attempted to select transmission positionk. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission positionk.

Driver's Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away

* The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission positionh,k or neutrali is selected. # Select park positionj when switching off the vehicle.

N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away

* While the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving, neutrali has been engaged. # To stop, depress the brake pedal. # Shift the transmission to park positionj while the vehicle is stationary. # To continue driving, select transmission positionh ork.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 347

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer

* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position can no longer be changed. # When transmission positionh is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the trans

mission position. # For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Reversing Not Possible Service Required

* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission positionk cannot be selected. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Malfunction Stop

* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutrali automatically. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Depress the brake pedal. # Engage park positionj. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Malfunction * The transmission is malfunctioning. The cause could be an overheated clutch or blocked gears. # Let the transmission cool down. # If the display message still appears following a restart, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

348 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

d Transmission Oil Overhea- ted Drive with Caution

* The transmission is overheating. When the display message is active, start-up and driving characteristics may be temporarily impaired. # Drive at low engine speed. # Avoid sporty driving. # Before pulling away on uphill gradients, let the transmission cool down until the display message disappears.

Parking Lock Inoperative Apply Parking Brake

* The transmission is malfunctioning. The park positionj cannot be selected. # Park the vehicle safely. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Teaching in Transmission Operate Selector Lever Apply Brake for XX s Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away

* The transmission is being taught in. There is a risk of the vehicle rolling away. # Depress and hold the brake pedal until the teach-in process has been completed.

The electric parking brake is applied automatically during the teach-in process. # Switch on the ignition. # Select park positionj, transmission positionk or neutrali.

Apply Parking Brake Risk of Rolling Away See Opera- tor's Manual

* The transmission position cannot be reliably identified. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Teaching in Transmission Complete

* The transmission's teach-in process is complete. All transmission positions can be selected again.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 349

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Transmission Malfunction Service Required

* The transmission is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Auxiliary Battery Malfunc- tion

* The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, always select park positionj manually before you switch off the engine. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

350 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Brakes

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

F (USA only)

! (Canada only) Parking Brake See Opera- tor's Manual

* The yellow! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 149).

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow! indicator lamp and the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp are lit. The elec tric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 149). or # Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 149). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 351

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

* The yellow! indicator lamp is lit and the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. The electric parking brake could not be applied or released. # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.

To apply: # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 149).

To release: # Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.

If the electric parking brake cannot be applied or the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow! indicator lamp is lit and the redF indicator lamp (USA only) or! indicator lamp (Can ada only) flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. If the charge level is too low: # Charge the 12 V battery.

352 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

To apply: # Switch the ignition off.

The electric parking brake will be applied automatically.

If you do not want the electric parking brake to be applied, e.g. at an automatic car wash or when the vehicle is being towed, leave the ignition switched on. This does not include having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised. If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 149).

If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

To release: # If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,

release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 149).

If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 353

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

F (USA only)

! (Canada only) Please Release Parking Brake

* The redF indicator lamp (USA only) or! indicator lamp (Canada only) is flashing. The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving: R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (/ page 149). R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 150).

# Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake. # Release the electric parking brake manually.

354 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

F (USA only)

! (Canada only) Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake

* The redF (USA only) or! indicator lamp (Canada only) is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off. # Switch on the ignition.

$ (USA only)

J (Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level

* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level

If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 355

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual

* The brakepads have reached the wear limit. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Off

* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled. # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 156).

ATTENTION ASSIST Inoper- ative

* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

356 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!

* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (/ page 158). # If necessary, take a break.

- - - mph

* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 161).

Cruise Control Inoperative * Cruise control is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control Off * Cruise control has been deactivated. If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 160).

- - - mph

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 164).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 357

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Suspended

* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC setting, the system will switch to passive mode (/ page 162).

Off

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 164).

Active Distance Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 162). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on.

Active Distance Assist Inop- erative

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Distance Assist Now Available

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again. # Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 164).

358 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Active Steering Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 168). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on. # Check the tire pressure if necessary.

Active Steering Assist Inop- erative

* Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Steering Asst. Cur- rently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emergency Stops

* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops. # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.

Active Steering Assist is available once more.

Beginning Emergency Stop * Your hands are not on the steering wheel. An emergency stop is being initiated (/ page 170). # Put your hands back on the steering wheel. You can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering R Braking or accelerating R Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 359

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 168). You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time. # Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions.

Traffic Sign Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable. When the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on.

Traffic Sign Assist Inopera- tive

* Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 180). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart

the engine.

Blind Spot Assist Inopera- tive

* Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

360 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 180). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart

the engine.

Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative

* Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 182). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on.

Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative

* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 361

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Currently Unavailable Radar Sensors Dirty

* The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes: R Dirt on the sensors R Heavy rain or snow R Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Clean all sensors (/ page 261). # Restart the engine.

362 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

_ Currently Unavailable Cam- era View Restricted

* The camera view is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision R Heavy rain, snow or fog R Condensation on the windshield in front of the camera

% Condensation detected on the windshield will be automatically removed with the aid of a built-in heater within approximately 12 minutes.

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield if necessary.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 363

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph

* The adjustable damping is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. # Do not drive at speeds greater than 50 mph (80 km/h). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning. Vehicles without Active Parking Assist: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

364 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Driving safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

! Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* ABS and ESP are temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable. The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP are malfunctioning

The wheels may lock during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph

(30 km/h). # If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive care

fully.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 365

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

! Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP are malfunctioning

The wheels may block during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* ESP is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning

If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

366 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h).

# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive care fully.

Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* ESP is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning

If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 367

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

T ! Inoperative See Operator's Manual

* EBD, ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP are malfunctioning

The wheels may block during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Brake Assist Func- tions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual

* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable. # Drive on.

As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart

the engine.

368 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Active Brake Assist Func- tions Limited See Opera- tor's Manual

* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially available. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes me connect

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Device Detected at Diag- nostics Connection See Operator's Manual

* The vehicle functions for malfunction detection are restricted. At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning. # Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (/ page 27). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

G Inoperative

* At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system or of the SOS emergency call system is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 369

Battery

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# 12 V Battery See Opera- tor's Manual

* The engine is off and the charge level is too low. # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.

To charge the 12 V battery: # Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive an extended distance.

* If the message appears while the engine is running, this indicates an on-board electrical system malfunction. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# See Operator's Manual

* The 12 V battery is not being charged.

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

370 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# Stop Vehicle See Opera- tor's Manual

* The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the charge level is too low.

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Switch off the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running

* The 12 V battery charge level is too low. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Leave the engine running. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 371

Tire pressure monitor

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Tire Press. Monitor Cur- rently Unavailable

* There is interference from a powerful radio signal source As a result, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are being received. The tire pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable. The tire pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. # Drive on.

Tire Press. Monitor Inopera- tive

* The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.

& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning

The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire Pressure Monitor Inop- erative No Wheel Sensors

* The wheels installed do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitoring system is deactivated. # Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.

h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing

* There is no signal from the tire pressure sensors of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the affected tire. # Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

372 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

h Check Tires

* The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position will be displayed.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure

R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tire pressure (/ page 288) and the tires.

h Please Correct Tire Pres- sure

* The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the difference in tire pressure between the individual wheels is too great. # Check the tire pressure and add air, if necessary. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure monitor (/ page 293).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 373

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

h Warning Tire Malfunction

* The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position will be displayed.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tire

R The tires can overheat and be damaged. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Do not drive with a flat tire. # Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissi

ble speed with a flat MOExtended tire. # Observe the notes on flat tires.

Notes in the event of a flat tire (/ page 266). # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tires.

Tires Overheated * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires

Overheated tires can burst.

374 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.

Decrease Speed * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires

Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.

Tire pressure loss warning system

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Check Tire Pressure Soon * Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss of pressure.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure

R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 375

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tire pressure (/ page 288) and the tires. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (/ page 294).

Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator

* Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (/ page 294).

Run Flat Indicator Inopera- tive

* Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

376 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Engine oil

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart)

* The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

# When next refueling, add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 254).

Notes on engine oil (/ page 326).

5 Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level

* The engine oil level is too high.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced.

5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off

* The engine oil level is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 377

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Switch off the engine. # Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 254). # Check the engine oil level.

Notes on engine oil (/ page 326).

5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Engine

* The oil pressure is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure

# Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured

* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

378 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning and indicator lamps Overview of indicator and warning lamps

Some systems will perform a self-test when the ignition is switched on. Some indicator and warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or flash after the engine has been star ted or during a journey.

Instrument Display (standard)

Widescreen Cockpit Instrument Display

Depending on the display setting, the positions of the indicator lamps on the Instrument Display may differ from the example shown.

Indicator and warning lamps: 6 Restraint system (/ page 380) Seat belt (/ page 380) Power steering (/ page 381) Vehicles with a Widescreen Cock

pit: coolant temperature (/ page 382)

; Check Engine (/ page 382)

# Electrical malfunction (/ page 382) Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap loca

tion indicator (/ page 382) F USA: electric parking brake (red)

(/ page 386) ! Canada: electric parking brake (red)

(/ page 386) ! Electric parking brake (yellow)

(/ page 386) USA: Recuperative Brake System

(/ page 386) J Canada: brakes (yellow)

(/ page 386) $ USA: brakes (red) (/ page 386) J Canada: brakes (red) (/ page 386) L Distance warning (/ page 389) ! ABS (/ page 390) ESP (/ page 390) ESP OFF (/ page 390) h Tire pressure monitoring system

(/ page 392)

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 379

T Parking lamps (/ page 109) L Low beam (/ page 109) K High beam (/ page 110) #! Turn signal lights (/ page 110) R Rear fog light (/ page 109)

Occupant safety

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

6 Restraint system warning lamp

* The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 37).

&WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully. # Note the messages on the multifunction display. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

380 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Seat belt warning lamp flashes

* The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 40). There are objects on the front passenger seat. # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.

Seat belt warning lamp lights up

*The red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds once the engine has started. In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound. The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 40).

If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.

Vehicle

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Power steering warning lamp (red)

* The red power steering system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.

&WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired

If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 381

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Note the messages on the multifunction display.

Engine

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Coolant warning lamp (red)

* The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The coolant level is too low R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed R The radiator fan is faulty R The engine coolant pump is faulty

If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded the maximum permissible temperature.

382 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

&WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood

If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Note the messages on the multifunction display.

If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the coolant temperature display is at the upper end of the temperature scale: # Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down. # Check the coolant level (/ page 255). # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the

coolant temperature display remains below the red area.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 383

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Coolant warning lamp (yel low)

* The yellow coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The charge air, transmission oil or battery cooling is faulty

# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

; Engine diagnosis warning lamp

* The yellow Check Engine warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode. In some states, legal requirements stipulate that you must immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. # Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Electrical malfunction warn ing lamp

* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit. There is a fault in the electrics. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.

384 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Fuel reserve warning lamp flashes

* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while you are driving. There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leak ing. # Close the fuel filler cap.

If the fuel filler cap has already been closed correctly: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up

* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 385

Brakes

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

F Electric parking brake indi cator lamp (red) (USA only)

! Electric parking brake indi cator lamp (red) (Canada only)

! The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp

*The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp also lights up in the event of a malfunction. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.

386 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Recuperative Brake System warning lamp (USA only)

J Brakes warning lamp (yel low) (Canada only)

*The yellow warning lamp (USA only) or the yellowJ brakes warning lamp (Canada only) is lit while the engine is running.

&WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction

If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front. # If the multifunction display shows a display message, observe it. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 387

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

$ Brake warning lamp (USA only)

J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only)

* The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

# Note the messages on the multifunction display.

&WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning

If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

&WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level

If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do

not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid.

388 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Driving systems

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Active Brake Assist warning lamp

* The white Active Brake Assist warning lamp is lit. The system is switched off or unavailable.

L Warning lamp for distance warning function

* The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed. # Be prepared to brake immediately. # Increase the distance.

Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 173).

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 389

Driving safety systems

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

! ABS warning lamp

* The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS is malfunctioning. If there is an additional warning tone, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.

&WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning

The wheels may lock during braking. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

ESP warning lamp flashes

* The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. One or more wheels has reached its grip limit (/ page 154). # Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

390 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ESP warning lamp lights up

* The yellow ESP warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.

&WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning

If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

ESP OFF warning lamp

* The yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP is deactivated. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.

&WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP deactivated

ESP does not act to stabilize the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited. # Drive on carefully. # Deactivate ESP only for as long as the situation requires.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 391

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

If ESP cannot be activated, ESP is malfunctioning. # Have ESP checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP (/ page 154).

Tire pressure monitor

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes

*The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

&WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning

The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

392 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up

*The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tire pressure monitoring system has detected tire pressure loss in at least one of the tires.

&WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure

R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tire pressure and the tires.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 393

1, 2, 3 ... 4MATIC ...................................................... 141

Function ............................................... 141 12 V battery

see Battery (vehicle) 12 V socket

see Socket (12 V) 360 Camera ........................................... 187

Function .............................................. 187 Opening the camera cover (rear view camera) ............................................... 189 Selecting a view ................................... 189

A A/C function

Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul timedia system) ................................... 122 Switching on/off (control panel) .......... 121

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ............. 153 Acceleration

see Kickdown

Accident and Breakdown Manage ment

Mercedes me connect ......................... 231 Acoustic locking verification signal

Activating/deactivating ......................... 67 Active Blind Spot Assist .......................... 180

Brake application ................................. 181 Function .............................................. 180 System limitations ............................... 180

Active Brake Assist Function/notes .................................... 173 Setting ................................................. 177

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ........ 162 Active Emergency Stop Assist ............. 170 Active Lane Change Assist ................... 171 Calling up a speed ............................... 164 Function .............................................. 162 Increasing/decreasing speed .............. 164 Requirements ...................................... 164 Route-based speed adaptation ............ 167 Steering wheel buttons ........................ 164 Storing a speed ................................... 164 Switching off/deactivating .................. 164 Switching on/activating ...................... 164

System limitations ............................... 162 Active Emergency Stop Assist ............... 170 Active Lane Change Assist ...................... 171

Activating/deactivating ....................... 172 Function ............................................... 171

Active Lane Keeping Assist .................... 182 Activating/deactivating ....................... 184 Activating/deactivating the warning .... 184 Function .............................................. 182 Setting the sensitivity .......................... 184 System limits ....................................... 182

Active Parking Assist .............................. 194 Exiting a parking space ........................ 197 Function .............................................. 194 Parking ................................................ 196 System limitations ............................... 194

Active Service System PLUS see ASSYST PLUS

Active Speed Limit Assist ....................... 166 Display ................................................. 166 Function .............................................. 166

Active Steering Assist ............................. 168 Activating/deactivating ....................... 170

394 Index

Active Emergency Stop Assist ............. 170 Active Lane Change Assist ................... 171 Function .............................................. 168 System limits ....................................... 168

Adaptive cruise control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Function ............................................... 112 Switching on/off .................................. 113

Additives .................................................. 326 Engine oil ............................................ 326 Fuel ..................................................... 326

Additives (engine oil) see Additives

Additives (fuel) see Fuel

After-sales service center see ASSYST PLUS

Air bag Reduced protection ............................... 44

Air conditioning menu Calling up ............................................ 122

Air distribution Setting (MBUX multimedia system) ..... 122

Air inlet see Air-water duct

Air pressure see Tire pressure

Air vents ................................................... 123 Adjusting (front) .................................. 123 Adjusting (rear) .................................... 124

Air vents see Air vents

Air-recirculation mode ............................ 123 Air-water duct .......................................... 256

Keeping free ........................................ 256 Airbag ......................................................... 42

Activation .............................................. 37 Front airbag (driver, front passenger) .... 42 Installation locations ............................. 42 Knee airbag ........................................... 42 Overview ............................................... 42 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp ..... 47 Protection .............................................. 43 Side airbag ............................................ 42

Window curtain airbag ........................... 42 Alarm

see Panic alarm Alarm system

see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) All-wheel drive

see 4MATIC Ambient lighting

Setting (multimedia system) ................ 114 Android Auto

see Smartphone integration Animals

Pets in the vehicle ................................. 65 Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-skid chains

see Snow chains Anti-theft protection

Immobilizer ............................................ 84 Anticipatory occupant protection

see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection)

Index 395

see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)

Apple CarPlay see Smartphone integration

Assistance systems see Driving safety system

ASSYST PLUS ........................................... 250 Battery disconnection periods ............. 251 Displaying the service due date ........... 250 Function/notes ................................... 250 Regular maintenance work .................. 250 Special service requirements .............. 250

ATA (anti-theft alarm system) .................. 84 Activating/deactivating the interior motion sensor ....................................... 86 Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm ..................................................... 85 Deactivating the alarm .......................... 85 Function ................................................ 84 Function of the interior motion sensor .. 86 The tow-away alarm function ................. 85

ATTENTION ASSIST .......................... 158, 160 Function .............................................. 158 Setting ................................................. 160

System limitations ............................... 158 Attention assistant

see ATTENTION ASSIST Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

see Qualified specialist workshop Authorized workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop Automatic car wash mode

Activating ............................................ 259 Automatic distance control

see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Automatic driving lights .......................... 110 Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .......................................... 132 Automatic engine stop (ECO start/ stop function) .......................................... 132 Automatic front passenger front air bag shutoff ........................................... 45, 47

Function of the automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff .............. 45 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp ..... 47

Automatic front passenger front air bag shutoff

see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff

Automatic measures after an accident ... 51 Automatic mirror folding function

Activating/deactivating ....................... 120 Automatic transmission

DIRECT SELECT lever ........................... 137 Drive program display .......................... 135 Drive programs .................................... 134 DYNAMIC SELECT switch .................... 134 Engaging drive position ....................... 139 Engaging neutral .................................. 138 Engaging park position ........................ 138 Engaging reverse gear ......................... 138 Kickdown ............................................. 141 Manual gearshifting ............................. 140 Steering wheel paddle shifters ............ 140 Transmission position display .............. 137 Transmission positions ........................ 137

Automatic transmission (problem) see Transmission (problem)

396 Index

B BAS (Brake Assist System) ..................... 153 Battery

SmartKey ............................................... 68 Battery

see Battery (vehicle) Battery (vehicle) ...................................... 277

Charging .............................................. 276 Charging (Remote Online) .................... 128 Notes ................................................... 273 Notes (starting assistance and charging) .............................................. 274 Replacing ............................................. 277 Starting assistance .............................. 276

Belt see Seat belt

Blind Spot Assist ..................................... 180 Activating/deactivating ....................... 182 Function .............................................. 180 System limitations ............................... 180

Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluid Notes ................................................... 327

Brake force distribution EBD (electronic brake force distribu tion) ..................................................... 155

Brakepad gauge ....................................... 257 Brakes

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 153 Active Brake Assist .............................. 173 BAS (Brake Assist System) .................. 153 Checking the brakepad thickness ........ 257 Driving tips .......................................... 129 EBD (electronic brake force distribu tion) ..................................................... 155 HOLD function ..................................... 156 Limited braking effect (salt-treated roads) .................................................. 129 New/replaced brakepads/brake discs .................................................... 129 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 129 Post-collision brake ................................ 51

Braking assistance see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Breakdown Changing a wheel ................................. 311 Overview of the help functions .............. 18 Roadside Assistance .............................. 24 Tow-starting ........................................ 283 Towing away ........................................ 279 Transporting the vehicle ...................... 281

Breakdown see Flat tire

Buttons Steering wheel .................................... 203

C Calls

Mercedes me ...................................... 232 Camera

see 360 Camera see Rear view camera

Car key see SmartKey

Car wash see Care

Car wash (care) ....................................... 257

Index 397

Car-to-X-Communication Displaying hazard warnings ................. 225

Care .......................................................... 263 Air-water duct ...................................... 256 Automatic car wash ............................. 257 Carpet ................................................. 263 Decorative foil ..................................... 261 Display ................................................ 263 Exterior lighting ................................... 261 Headliner ............................................. 263 Matte finish ......................................... 260 Paintwork ............................................ 260 Plastic trim .......................................... 263 Power washer ...................................... 259 Real wood/trim elements ................... 263 Rear view camera ................................ 261 Seat belt .............................................. 263 Seat cover ........................................... 263 Sensors ............................................... 261 Steering wheel .................................... 263 Surround view camera ......................... 261 Tailpipes ............................................... 261 Washing by hand ................................. 260 Wheels/rims ........................................ 261 Windows .............................................. 261

Wiper blades ........................................ 261 Cargo tie-down rings ............................... 103 Carpet (Care) ........................................... 263 Change of address ..................................... 24 Change of ownership ................................ 24 Changing a wheel

Preparation .......................................... 311 Raising the vehicle ............................... 312

Changing a wheel see Emergency spare wheel

Changing gears ........................................ 140 Manually .............................................. 140

Changing hub caps .................................. 311 Charging

Battery (vehicle) ................................... 276 USB port .............................................. 105

Checking the brakepad thickness ......... 257 Child safety lock

Rear doors ............................................. 63 Rear side windows ................................. 64

Child seat Attaching (notes) ................................... 55

Basic instructions .................................. 51 Front-passenger seat (notes) ................. 61 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (installing) ............ 56 Notes on risks and dangers ................... 52 Securing on the front passenger seat .... 62 Securing on the rear seat ...................... 60 Top Tether .............................................. 58

Children Avoiding dangers in the vehicle ............. 52 Basic instructions .................................. 51 Special seat belt retractor ..................... 56

Chock ........................................................ 310 Storage location ................................... 310

Chock see Chock

Cleaning see Care

Climate control Activating/deactivating ....................... 121 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (control panel) ........................ 121 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (MBUX multimedia system) .... 122

398 Index

Activating/deactivating the synchro nization function (control panel) .......... 122 Activating/deactivating the synchro nization function (MBUX multimedia system) ................................................ 122 Air-recirculation mode ......................... 123 Automatic control ................................ 122 Calling up the air conditioning menu ... 122 Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control ..................................... 121 Filling capacity for PAG oil ................... 330 Front air vents ..................................... 123 Note ..................................................... 121 Rear air vents ....................................... 124 Refrigerant .......................................... 329 Refrigerant filling capacity ................... 330 Removing condensation from the windows .............................................. 123 Residual heat ....................................... 123 Setting (MBUX multimedia system) ..... 122 Ventilating the vehicle (convenience opening) ................................................ 78

Cockpit ......................................................... 6 Overview ................................................. 6

Coffee cup symbol see ATTENTION ASSIST

Collision detection (parked vehicle) ...... 150 Combination switch ................................ 110 Computer

see On-board computer Consumption indicator

Calling up ............................................ 137 Convenience closing feature .................... 79 Convenience opening ................................ 78 Coolant (engine)

Capacity .............................................. 328 Check level .......................................... 255 Notes ................................................... 327

Copyrights License .................................................. 35 Trademarks ............................................ 35

Cornering light ......................................... 112 Cross Traffic Alert ................................... 199 Crosswind Assist

Function/notes ................................... 155

Cruise control .......................................... 160 Activating ............................................. 161 Buttons ................................................ 161 Calling up a speed ............................... 161 Deactivating ......................................... 161 Function .............................................. 160 Requirements: ...................................... 161 Selecting .............................................. 161 Setting a speed .................................... 161 Storing a speed .................................... 161 System limitations ............................... 160

Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ......... 29 Customer Relations Department ............. 29

D Damping adjustment .............................. 184 Dashboard

see Cockpit Data acquisition

Vehicle .................................................. 30 Data protection rights

Data storage .......................................... 33

Index 399

Data storage Data protection rights ........................... 33 Electronic control units ......................... 30 Online services ...................................... 33 Vehicle .................................................. 30

Deactivating the alarm (ATA) .................... 85 Dealership

see Qualified specialist workshop Declaration of conformity

Wireless vehicle components ................ 26 Decorative foil (cleaning instructions) .. 261 Definitions (tires and loading) ............... 304 Destination entry .................................... 223

Entering a POI or address .................... 223 Detecting inattentiveness

see ATTENTION ASSIST Diagnostics connection ............................ 27 Digital Operator's Manual ........................ 20 Dinghy towing

see Tow-bar system DIRECT SELECT lever ............................... 137

Engaging drive position ....................... 139

Engaging neutral .................................. 138 Engaging park position ........................ 138 Engaging park position automatically .. 138 Engaging reverse gear ......................... 138 Function .............................................. 137

Display (care) ........................................... 263 Display (MBUX multimedia system)

Home screen ....................................... 209 Display (multimedia system) .................. 210

Operating ............................................. 210 Display (on-board computer)

Displays on the multifunction display .. 205 Display message ..................................... 332

Calling up (on-board computer) ........... 332 Notes .................................................. 332

Display messages - - - mph ...................................... 357 - - - mph ...................................... 357 # 12 V Battery See Operator's Manual ................................................ 370 : Active Headlamps Inoperative .... 339

ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative ............................................................. 356 ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! .................................................. 357 : Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative .......................................... 338 Before Starting the Engine, Turn Steering Wheel ............................ 342 $ Check Brake Fluid Level ............. 355 # Check Brake Pads See Opera tor's Manual ........................................ 356 + Check Coolant Level See Oper ator's Manual ...................................... 344 5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart) .................................................. 377 : Check Left Low Beam (exam ple) ...................................................... 338 h Check Tires ................................ 373 Check Washer Fluid ................... 344

400 Index

Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off .................................... 345 _ Currently Unavailable Camera View Restricted ................................... 363 Currently Unavailable Radar Sensors Dirty ...................................... 362 ! Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ............................... 365 Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ............................... 366 Don't Forget Your Key ................ 337 5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured ............................................ 378 5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehi cle Turn Engine Off .............................. 377 5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Engine ................................ 378 5 Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level ........ 377 6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example) ............................. 333

Fuel Level Low ............................ 346 Gas Cap Loose ........................... 346 ! Inoperative See Operator's Manual ................................................ 366 Inoperative See Operator's Manual ................................................ 367 T Inoperative See Operator's Manual ................................................ 368 G Inoperative ................................. 369 : Intell. Light System Inoperative ............................................................. 339 Key Not Detected (red display message) ............................................. 337 Key Not Detected (white dis play message) ..................................... 336 6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Mal function Service Required (example) ... 333 Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph ..................................................... 364

: Malfunction See Operators Manual ................................................ 338 Obtain a New Key ....................... 336 Off .............................................. 358 Off .............................................. 356 F Parking Brake See Operator's Manual ................................................. 351 h Please Correct Tire Pressure ...... 373 F Please Release Parking Brake .... 354 Replace Key Battery ................... 336 # See Operator's Manual ............... 370 6 SRS Malfunction Service Required .............................................. 333 Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Man ual ....................................................... 341 Steering Malfunction See Oper ator's Manual ...................................... 342 Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual .... 341

Index 401

# Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Run ning ..................................................... 371 # Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual ................................................. 371 Suspended ................................. 358 : Switch Off Lights ........................ 339 : Switch On Headlamps ................ 339 d Transmission Oil Overheated Drive with Caution ............................... 349 F Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake ................................ 355 d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting .............. 341 h Warning Tire Malfunction ............ 374 h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing ............ 372 Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ..... 361 Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative .... 361

Active Brake Assist Functions Cur rently Limited See Operator's Man ual ....................................................... 368 Active Brake Assist Functions Limi ted See Operator's Manual .................. 369 Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ..... 358 Active Distance Assist Inoperative ...... 358 Active Distance Assist Now Available ............................................................. 358 Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ..... 361 Active Lane Keeping Assist Inopera tive ....................................................... 361 Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ..... 359 Active Steering Assist Inoperative ....... 359 Active Steering Asst. Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emer gency Stops ......................................... 359

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual ..... 340 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inopera tive ...................................................... 340 Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' ............... 346 Apply Brake to Shift to 'R' ................... 347 Apply Brake to Shift to D or R .............. 347 Apply Parking Brake Risk of Rolling Away See Operator's Manual .............. 349 Auxiliary Battery Malfunction .............. 350 Beginning Emergency Stop .................. 359 Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila ble See Operator's Manual .................. 360 Blind Spot Assist Inoperative ............... 360 Check Tire Pressure Soon ................... 375 Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator ................................ 376 Cruise Control Inoperative ................... 357 Cruise Control Off ............................... 357 Decrease Speed .................................. 375

402 Index

Device Detected at Diagnostics Con nection See Operator's Manual ........... 369 Driver's Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away ... 347 Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual ............................... 334 Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual ............................... 334 Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunc tioning ................................................. 340 N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away .................................................... 347 Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Sta tionary ................................................. 346 Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual ..... 364 Parking Lock Inoperative Apply Park ing Brake ............................................. 349 Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual ........................ 337

PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Opera tor's Manual ........................................ 335 Reversing Not Possible Service Required .............................................. 348 Run Flat Indicator Inoperative .............. 376 Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer .......................................... 348 Teaching in Transmission Complete .... 349 Teaching in Transmission Operate Selector Lever Apply Brake for XX s Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away ................ 349 Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable .......................................... 372 Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative ............ 372 Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors ..................................... 372 Tires Overheated ................................. 374 To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine .................................. 347

To switch engine off, press and hold Start/Stop button for at least 3 sec onds or press 3 times. ........................ 344 Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavail able See Operator's Manual ................ 360 Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative ............. 360 Transmission Malfunction .................... 348 Transmission Malfunction Service Required .............................................. 350 Transmission Malfunction Stop ........... 348

Display on the windshield see Head-up Display

Distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

DISTRONIC see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Door Child safety lock (rear doors) ................ 63 Locking (emergency key) ....................... 72 Opening (from inside) ............................ 70 Unlocking (emergency key) .................... 72 Unlocking (from inside) ......................... 70

Index 403

Door control panel ..................................... 16 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ... 300 Drawbar

see Tow-bar system Drinking and driving ................................ 129 Drive Away Assist .................................... 198 Drive Away Assist

see Protection against collision Drive position

Inserting .............................................. 139 Drive program display ............................. 135 Drive programs

see DYNAMIC SELECT Driver's seat

see Seat Driving safety system .............................. 151

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 153 Active Brake Assist .............................. 173 BAS (Brake Assist System) .................. 153 Cameras .............................................. 152 EBD (electronic brake force distribu tion) ..................................................... 155

ESP Crosswind Assist ........................ 155 Overview ............................................. 152 Radar and ultrasonic sensors .............. 152 Responsibility ....................................... 151 STEER CONTROL ................................. 156

Driving system Suspension with adaptive damping adjustment .......................................... 184

Driving system see 360 Camera see Active Blind Spot Assist see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Active Emergency Stop Assist see Active Lane Change Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist see Active Parking Assist see Active Speed Limit Assist see Active Steering Assist see ATTENTION ASSIST see Blind Spot Assist see Cruise control see Driving safety system see HOLD function see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC see Rear view camera

see Start-off assist see Traffic Sign Assist

Driving tips Drinking and driving ............................ 129 General driving tips ............................. 129 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 129

Drowsiness detection see ATTENTION ASSIST

Dynamic handling control system see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

DYNAMIC SELECT .................................... 134 Configuring drive program I ................. 136 Displaying engine data ........................ 136 Displaying vehicle data ........................ 136 Drive program display .......................... 135 Drive programs .................................... 134 Function .............................................. 134 Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch) ............................................................. 135 Selecting the drive program ................ 135

DYNAMIC SELECT switch Damping adjustment ........................... 184

404 Index

E E10 ............................................................ 325 Easy entry feature

Function/notes ..................................... 96 Setting ................................................... 97

Easy exit feature Function/notes ..................................... 96 Setting ................................................... 97

EBD (electronic brake force distribu tion)

Function/notes ................................... 155 ECO display

Function .............................................. 134 ECO start/stop function ......................... 132

Automatic engine start ........................ 132 Automatic engine stop ......................... 132 Method of operation ............................ 132 Switching off/on ................................. 133

Electric parking brake ............................. 148 Applying automatically ........................ 148 Applying or releasing manually ............ 149 Emergency braking .............................. 150 Releasing automatically ....................... 149

Electronic Stability Program see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

Emergency First-aid kit (soft sided) ....................... 266 Overview of the help functions .............. 18 Reflective safety vest .......................... 265 Removing the warning triangle ............ 265 Setting up the warning triangle ........... 266

Emergency braking ................................. 150 Emergency braking

see BAS (Brake Assist System) Emergency engine start ......................... 283 Emergency key

Locking a door ....................................... 72 Unlocking a door ................................... 72

Emergency operation mode Starting the vehicle .............................. 127

Emergency release Trunk lid (from inside) ............................ 76

Emergency spare wheel .......................... 317 Inflating ............................................... 318 Notes ................................................... 317

Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation .............................................. 37

Engine ECO start/stop function ...................... 132 Engine number .................................... 322 Starting (emergency operation mode) .................................................. 127 Starting (Remote Online) ..................... 128 Starting (start/stop button) ................. 126 Starting assistance .............................. 276 Switching off (start/stop button) ........ 144

Engine data Displaying ............................................ 136

Engine number ........................................ 322 Engine oil ................................................. 254

Additives ............................................. 326 Capacity .............................................. 327 Checking the oil level using the on- board computer ................................... 253 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval ............... 327 Quality ................................................. 327 Topping up ........................................... 254

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

Index 405

ESP Crosswind Assist ................................. 155

ESP (Electronic Stability Program) ...... 154 Activating/deactivating ....................... 155 Function/notes ................................... 154

Exterior lighting see Lights

Exterior lighting (care) ............................ 261 Exterior mirrors ................................ 117, 118

Anti-glare mode (automatic) ................. 118 Automatic mirror folding function ........ 120 Folding in/out ...................................... 117 Operating the memory function ............ 98 Parking position ................................... 119 Setting ................................................. 117

F Fatigue detection

see ATTENTION ASSIST First-aid kit (soft sided) .......................... 266 Flat tire ..................................................... 266

Changing a wheel ................................. 311 MOExtended tires ................................ 267

Notes .................................................. 266 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 268

Flat towing see Tow-bar system

Floor mats ................................................ 107 Foil covering

Radar and ultrasonic sensors .............. 152 Free software ............................................ 35 Frequencies

Two-way radio ...................................... 321 Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ..... 42 Front passenger seat

see Seat Fuel ........................................................... 326

Additives ............................................. 326 E10 ...................................................... 325 Fuel reserve ........................................ 326 Gasoline .............................................. 325 Quality (gasoline) ................................ 325 Refueling ............................................. 142 Sulfur content ..................................... 325 Tank content ....................................... 326

Function seat see Door control panel

Fuses ........................................................ 283 Before replacing a fuse ........................ 283 Fuse assignment diagram ................... 283 Fuse box in the engine compartment .. 284 Fuse box in the front-passenger foot well ...................................................... 285 Fuse box in the trunk ........................... 286 Notes .................................................. 283

Fuses see Fuses

G Garage door opener

Clearing the memory ........................... 148 Opening or closing the door ................ 147 Programming buttons .......................... 145 Resolving problems ............................. 147 Synchronizing the rolling code ............. 147

Gasoline ................................................... 325 Gearshift recommendation .................... 140 Genuine parts ............................................ 22

406 Index

Genuine wood (Care) .............................. 263 Glide mode ............................................... 141

H Handbrake

see Electric parking brake Handling characteristics (unusual) ....... 287 HANDS-FREE ACCESS ................................ 75 Hazard warning lights .............................. 111 Hazardous substances

Information ............................................ 25 Head restraint

Front (adjusting mechanically) ............... 91 Rear (installing/removing) ..................... 92 Rear passenger compartment (adjusting) ............................................. 92

Head-up Display ...................................... 206 Adjusting display elements (on-board computer) ............................................ 206 Adjusting the brightness (on-board computer) ............................................ 206 Function .............................................. 205 Menu (on-board computer) .................. 206

Operating the memory function ............ 98 Setting the position (on-board com puter) .................................................. 206 Switching on/off ................................. 207

Headlamps see Automatic driving lights

Headliner (care) ....................................... 263 Help call

see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system High beam

Activating/deactivating ....................... 110 High-beam flasher ................................... 110 High-beam headlamps

Adaptive Highbeam Assist ................... 112 Hill start assist ........................................ 157 HOLD function ......................................... 156

Function/notes ................................... 156 Switching on/off ................................. 156

Home screen (media display) Overview ............................................. 209

Hood Opening/closing .................................. 251

I Identification plate

Engine ................................................. 322 Refrigerant .......................................... 329 Vehicle ................................................ 322

Ignition Switching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 125

Ignition key see SmartKey

Immobilizer ................................................ 84 Indicator lamps

see Warning/indicator lamps Individual drive program

Configuring .......................................... 136 Selecting ............................................. 135

Inside rearview mirror see Exterior mirrors

Inspection see ASSYST PLUS

Instrument cluster Function/notes ........................... 201, 202

Index 407

Instrument Display Function/notes ................................... 202 Instrument cluster ................................. 10 Warning/indicator lamps ..................... 379

Instrument Display and on-board computer

Function/notes ................................... 201 Intelligent Light System

Adaptive Highbeam Assist ................... 112 Cornering light ..................................... 112

Interior lighting ........................................ 114 Adjusting .............................................. 114 Ambient lighting ................................... 114 Reading lamp ....................................... 114 Switch-off delay time ........................... 115

Interior motion sensor Activating/deactivating ......................... 86 Function ................................................ 86

Internet radio see TuneIn

iPhone see Smartphone integration

J Jack

Storage location ................................... 310 Jump-start connection ............................ 276

General notes ...................................... 274

K KEYLESS-GO

Locking the vehicle ................................ 70 Problem ................................................. 71 Unlocking setting ................................... 67 Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 70

Kickdown .................................................. 141 Using ................................................... 141

Knee airbag ................................................ 42

L Labeling (tires)

see Tire labeling Lamp

see Interior lighting Lamps (Instrument Display)

see Warning/indicator lamps

Lane detection (automatic) see Active Lane Keeping Assist

Lane Keeping Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur ing system

Installing ................................................ 56 Light switch

Overview ............................................. 109 Lighting

see Interior lighting see Lights

Lights ....................................................... 109 Adaptive Highbeam Assist ................... 112 Automatic driving lights ....................... 110 Combination switch ............................. 110 Cornering light ..................................... 112 Hazard warning lights ........................... 111 High beam ........................................... 110 High-beam flasher ................................ 110 Light switch ......................................... 109 Low-beam headlamps ......................... 109 Parking lights ....................................... 109 Rear fog lamp ...................................... 109

408 Index

Responsibility for lighting systems ...... 109 Setting the exterior lighting switch- off delay time ....................................... 113 Standing lights ..................................... 109 Switching the surround lighting on/off .................................................. 113 Turn signal light .................................... 110

Limited Warranty Vehicle .................................................. 30

Live Traffic Information Switching the traffic information dis play on ................................................ 225

Load index (tires) .................................... 302 Load-bearing capacity (tires) ................. 302 Loading ..................................................... 103

Cargo tie-down rings ........................... 103 Definitions ........................................... 304 Notes ..................................................... 98 Roof luggage rack ................................ 104

Loading guidelines .................................... 98 Loading information table ...................... 295 Loads

Securing ................................................ 98

Locking/unlocking Activating/deactivating the auto matic locking feature ............................. 71 Emergency key ...................................... 72 KEYLESS-GO .......................................... 70 Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside .............................................. 70

Low-beam headlamps Switching on/off ................................. 109

Lubricant additives see Additives

Luggage Securing ................................................ 98

Lumbar support see Lumbar support (4-way)

Lumbar support (4-way) ........................... 91

M Maintenance

Vehicle ................................................... 24 Maintenance

see ASSYST PLUS

Malfunction Restraint system .................................... 37

Malfunction message see Display message

Maneuvering assistance Activating/deactivating ....................... 199 Cross Traffic Alert ................................ 199 Drive Away Assist ................................ 198

Map ........................................................... 225 Displaying online map contents .......... 225 Displaying weather information ........... 225 Moving ................................................ 225 Selecting the map orientation ............. 225 Setting the map scale .......................... 225 Switching freeway information on/off ................................................. 225

Massage program Resetting the settings ............................ 93

Massage programs Selecting the front seats ....................... 93

Massage settings Resetting ............................................... 93

Matte finish (cleaning instructions) ...... 260

Index 409

Maximum load rating .............................. 301 Maximum permissible load

Calculation example ............................ 297 Determining ........................................ 296

Maximum tire pressure .......................... 301 MBUX Interior Assistant

Switching the reading light for the driver and front passenger on/off contact-free ......................................... 215 Switching the search light for the driver on/off ........................................ 215

MBUX Interior Assistant (multimedia system) ..................................................... 212

Overview .............................................. 212 MBUX multimedia system ...................... 208

Activating/deactivating standby mode ................................................... 151 Configuring drive program I ................. 136 Notes .................................................. 208 Overview ............................................. 208 Setting route-based speed adapta tion ...................................................... 168 Standby mode function ........................ 151

Mechanical key Inserting/removing ............................... 68

Media Overview of the functions and sym bols ..................................................... 242

Media mode Connecting Bluetooth audio equip ment .................................................... 243

Medical aids ............................................... 28 Memory function

Function ................................................ 97 Head-up Display Calling up stored settings ................................................. 98 Head-up Display Storing settings ....... 98 Operating .............................................. 98 Outside mirrors Calling up stored settings ................................................. 98 Outside mirrors Storing settings ........ 98 Seat Calling up stored settings .......... 98 Seat Storing settings .......................... 98

Menu (on-board computer) Head-up Display .................................. 206 Overview ............................................. 203

Mercedes me app Information .......................................... 236

Mercedes me calls Arranging a service appointment ........ 234 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center ................................................. 233 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center after automatic accident or breakdown detection ........................... 233 Information .......................................... 233 Making a call via the overhead con trol panel ............................................. 232 Transferred data .................................. 234

Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Manage ment .................................................... 231 Information .......................................... 230 Transferred data .................................. 232

Mercedes-AMG vehicles Notes ................................................... 125

Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys tem ........................................................... 238

Automatic emergency call ................... 239 Information .......................................... 238

410 Index

Information on data transfer ................ 240 Manual emergency call ........................ 240 Overview ............................................. 239

Mercedes-Benz Link see Smartphone integration

Message (multifunction display) see Display message

Message memory .................................... 332 Mirrors

see Exterior mirrors Mobile phone

Wireless charging ................................ 107 Mobile phone

see Smartphone integration see Telephone

Model series see Vehicle identification plate

MOExtended tires .................................... 267 Multifunction display

Overview of the displays ...................... 205 Multifunction steering wheel

Overview of buttons ............................ 203

Multifunction steering wheel see Steering wheel

Multimedia system Collision detection (parked vehicle) ..... 150

Multimedia system see Display (multimedia system) see MBUX Interior Assistant (multi media system) see MBUX multimedia system see Touchpad

N Navigation

Overview ............................................. 222 Showing/hiding the menu ................... 221 Switching on ........................................ 221

Navigation see Destination entry see Map see Route

Neutral Inserting .............................................. 138

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ....... 129

O Occupant safety

see Airbag see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff see Automatic measures after an accident see Pets in the vehicle see Post-collision brake see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection) see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) see Restraint system see Seat belt

Oil see Engine oil

On-board computer ................................. 203 Displaying the service due date ........... 250 Head-up Display menu ........................ 206 Multifunction display ........................... 205 Operating ............................................ 203 Overview of menus .............................. 203

On-board diagnostics interface see Diagnostics connection

Index 411

Online services Data storage .......................................... 33

Open-source software .............................. 35 Opening the trunk lid using your foot

HANDS-FREE ACCESS ........................... 75 Operating fluids

Additives (fuel) .................................... 326 Brake fluid ........................................... 327 Coolant (engine) .................................. 327 Engine oil ............................................ 326 Fuel (gasoline) ..................................... 325 Notes .................................................. 323 Refrigerant (air conditioning system) ... 329 Windshield washer fluid ...................... 328

Operating safety Declaration of conformity (wireless vehicle components) ............................. 26 Information ............................................ 25

Operating system see On-board computer

Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment ................................. 23

Operator's Manual (digital) ...................... 20

Overhead control panel Overview ................................................ 14

P Paint code ................................................ 322 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ......... 260 Panic alarm ................................................ 67

Activating/deactivating ......................... 67 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

see Sliding sunroof Park position

Inserting .............................................. 138 Selecting automatically ....................... 138

Parking see Electric parking brake

Parking aid see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC .................. 189 Activating ............................................ 193 Adjusting warning tones ...................... 194 Function .............................................. 189 Side impact protection ........................ 192

Switching off ....................................... 193 System limitations ............................... 189

Parking assistance systems see Active Parking Assist

Parking brake see Electric parking brake

Parking for an extended period .............. 150 Parking lights ........................................... 109 Parking position

Exterior mirrors .................................... 119 Storing the position of the front- passenger outside mirror using reverse gear ......................................... 120

PASSENGER AIR BAG status display see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff

Payload Calculation example ............................ 297 Determining the maximum .................. 296

Period out of use Activating/deactivating standby mode ................................................... 151 Standby mode function ........................ 151

412 Index

Permitted towing methods ..................... 278 Pets in the vehicle ..................................... 65 Plastic trim (Care) ................................... 263 Post-collision brake ................................... 51 Power supply

Switching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 125 Power washer (care) ............................... 259 Power windows

see Side windows

PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protection) ................................................. 50

Function ................................................ 50 PRE-SAFE Sound ................................. 50 Reversing measures .............................. 50

PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occu pant protection plus) ................................ 50

Function ................................................ 50 Reversing measures .............................. 50

Preventative occupant protection sys tem

see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection)

Profile ....................................................... 215 Creating a new profile .......................... 217 Notes ................................................... 215 Selecting profile options ...................... 217

Programs see DYNAMIC SELECT

Protecting the environment Notes ..................................................... 22

Protection against collision .................... 198

Q QR code

Rescue card .......................................... 30 Qualified specialist workshop ................. 28

R Radar and ultrasonic sensors

Damage ............................................... 152 Radio

Overview of the functions and sym bols ..................................................... 244

Radio operating permits ......................... 322

Rain-closing feature Sliding sunroof ...................................... 82

Reading lamp see Interior lighting

Reading light Switching on/off with hand move ments .................................................. 215

Rear doors (child safety lock) .................. 63 Rear fog lamp

Switching on/off .................................. 110 Rear seat

see Seat Rear view camera .................................... 185

Care ..................................................... 261 Function .............................................. 185 Opening the camera cover (360 Camera) ............................................... 189

Reflective safety vest ............................. 265 Refrigerant (air conditioning system)

Notes .................................................. 329 Refueling

Refueling the vehicle ........................... 142

Index 413

Remote Online Charging the starter battery ................ 128 Cooling or heating the vehicle inte rior ....................................................... 128 Starting the vehicle ............................. 128

Reporting safety defects .......................... 29 Rescue card ............................................... 30 Reserve

Fuel ..................................................... 326 Residual heat ........................................... 123 Restraint system ....................................... 36

Basic instructions for children ............... 51 Function in an accident ......................... 37 Functionality .......................................... 36 Malfunction ........................................... 37 Protection .............................................. 36 Reduced protection ............................... 36 Self-test ................................................. 36 Warning lamp ........................................ 36

Reverse gear Inserting .............................................. 138

Rims (care) ............................................... 261 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) ........... 24

Roll away protection see HOLD function

Roller sunblind Panorama roof with power tilt/slid ing panel ................................................ 80

Roof load .................................................. 331 Roof luggage rack

Loading ............................................... 104 Securing .............................................. 104

Route ........................................................ 224 Calculating .......................................... 224 Selecting options ................................. 224

Route guidance with augmented real ity

Activating ............................................ 224 Displaying street names and house numbers .............................................. 224

Route-based speed adaptation Function ............................................... 167 Setting ................................................. 168

Run-flat characteristics MOExtended tires ................................ 267

S Safety systems

see Driving safety system Satellite radio

Logging in ............................................ 248 Setting music and sport alerts ............ 248

Search light Switching on/off with hand move ments .................................................. 215

Seat ..................................................... 87, 101 4-way lumbar support ............................ 91 Adjusting (electrically) ........................... 90 Adjusting (Seat Comfort) ....................... 90 Adjustment (without Seat Comfort Package) ................................................ 88 Backrest (rear) locking ........................ 103 Configuring the settings ........................ 93 Correct driver's seat position ................ 87 Folding the backrest (rear passenger compartment) back ............................. 102 Folding the backrest (rear) forwards .... 101 Operating the memory function ............ 98 Resetting the settings ............................ 93 Setting options ...................................... 16

414 Index

Seat belt ..................................................... 38 Care .................................................... 263 Fastening ............................................... 40 Protection .............................................. 38

Seat belt adjustment Activating/deactivating ......................... 41 Function ................................................. 41

Seat belt warning see Seat belts

Seat belts ................................................... 42 Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment ............................................ 41 Reduced protection ............................... 39 Releasing ............................................... 42 Seat belt adjustment (function) ............. 41 Warning lamp ........................................ 42

Seat cover (Care) ..................................... 263 Seat heating

Activating/deactivating ......................... 93 Seat ventilation

Activating/deactivating ......................... 94 Selecting a gear

see Changing gears

Selector lever see DIRECT SELECT lever

Self-test Automatic front passenger front air bag shutoff ............................................ 47

Sensors (care) .......................................... 261 Service center

see Qualified specialist workshop Service interval display

see ASSYST PLUS Setting a speed

see Cruise control Setting the map scale

see Map Shift paddles

see Steering wheel paddle shifters Shifting gears

Gearshift recommendation .................. 140 Side airbag ................................................. 42 Side impact protection ........................... 192

Side windows ............................................. 77 Child safety lock in the rear passenger compartment ....................... 64 Closing .................................................. 77 Closing using the SmartKey ................... 79 Convenience closing feature ................. 79 Convenience opening ............................ 78 Opening ................................................. 77 Opening with the SmartKey ................... 78 Problem ................................................. 79

Size designation (tires) ........................... 302 Sliding sunroof .......................................... 80

Automatic features ................................ 82 Closing .................................................. 80 Closing using the SmartKey ................... 79 Opening ................................................. 80 Opening with the SmartKey ................... 78 Problem ................................................. 83 Rain-closing feature ............................... 82

SmartKey ................................................... 66 Acoustic locking verification signal ........ 67 Battery .................................................. 68 Energy consumption .............................. 67 Features ................................................ 66 Key ring attachment .............................. 68

Index 415

Mechanical key ...................................... 68 Overview ............................................... 66 Panic alarm ............................................ 67 Problem ................................................. 69 Unlocking setting ................................... 67

SmartKey functions Deactivating .......................................... 67

Smartphone see Smartphone integration see Telephone

Smartphone integration ......................... 237 Overview ............................................. 237

Snow chains ............................................ 288 Socket (12 V) ............................................ 105

Front center console ........................... 105 Trunk/cargo compartment .................. 105

Software update System updates ................................... 218

Sound PRE-SAFE Sound ................................. 50 Wheels and tires .................................. 287

Sound menu Functions overview .............................. 249

Spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel

Special seat belt retractor ........................ 56 Specialist workshop .................................. 28 Speed index (tires) .................................. 302 Standby mode

Activating/deactivating ....................... 151 Function ............................................... 151

Standing lights ........................................ 109 Start-off assist ......................................... 158

Activating ............................................ 158 Function .............................................. 157

Start/stop button Parking the vehicle .............................. 144 Starting the vehicle ............................. 126 Switching on the power supply or ignition ................................................ 125

Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function

Starter battery Charging (Remote Online) .................... 128

Starting assistance see Jump-start connection

Starting the engine see Vehicle

Starting-off aid see Hill start assist

STEER CONTROL Function/notes ................................... 156

Steering wheel ........................................ 203 Adjusting (manually) .............................. 95 Buttons ................................................ 203 Care .................................................... 263 Steering wheel heater ........................... 95

Steering wheel heater Switching on/off ................................... 95

Steering wheel paddle shifters .............. 140 Storage areas

see Storage compartment Storage compartment ............................. 100

Armrest ............................................... 100 Center console .................................... 100 Door .................................................... 100 Glove box ............................................. 100

416 Index

Storage compartments see Storage compartment

Storage spaces USB ports ............................................ 100

Stowage areas see Loading

Stowage compartments see Loading

Suggestions Configuring .......................................... 217

Sulfur content ......................................... 325 Surround lighting

Switching on/off .................................. 113 Surround View

see 360 Camera Surround view camera

Care ..................................................... 261 Suspension

Adaptive damping adjustment ............. 184 Damping characteristics ...................... 184

Switch-off delay time Exterior ................................................ 113 Interior ................................................. 115

Synchronization function Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul timedia system) ................................... 122 Switching on/off (control panel) ......... 122

System settings Overview of the system settings menu ................................................... 217

T Tailpipes (care) ......................................... 261 Tank content

Fuel ..................................................... 326 Reserve (fuel) ...................................... 326

Technical data Information .......................................... 320 Radio operating permits ...................... 322 Vehicle identification plate .................. 322

Telephone ........................................ 226, 229 Connecting a mobile phone (Pass key) ..................................................... 230 Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Simple Pairing) .................................... 230 Functions in the telephone menu ........ 230 Notes .................................................. 226

Operating modes ................................. 229 Telephone menu overview ................... 229 Wireless charging (mobile phone) ........ 107

Telephony operating modes Bluetooth Telephony .......................... 229

Temperature grade .................................. 299 Themes

Fastening ............................................. 217 Through-loading feature

see Seat TIN (Tire Identification Number) ............ 300 Tire and Loading Information placard ... 295 Tire characteristics ................................. 302 Tire inflation compressor

see TIREFIT kit Tire information table ............................. 295 Tire labeling ............................................. 299

Characteristics .................................... 302 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................................. 300 Load index ........................................... 302 Load-bearing capacity ......................... 302

Index 417

Maximum tire load ............................... 301 Maximum tire pressure ........................ 301 Overview ............................................. 299 Speed rating ........................................ 302 Temperature grade .............................. 299 Tire Quality Grading ............................. 299 Tire size designation ............................ 302 Traction grade ..................................... 299 Tread wear grade ................................. 299

Tire load (maximum) ............................... 301 Tire pressure .................................... 290, 291

Checking (manually) ............................ 291 Checking (tire pressure monitoring system) ............................................... 293 Maximum ............................................. 301 Notes .................................................. 288 Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system ................................... 294 Restarting the tire pressure monitor ing system ........................................... 293 Tire pressure loss warning system (function) ............................................. 294 Tire pressure monitoring system (function) ............................................. 291 Tire pressure table .............................. 290

TIREFIT kit ........................................... 268 Tire pressure loss warning system

Function .............................................. 294 Restarting ............................................ 294

Tire pressure monitor Function .............................................. 291 Restarting ............................................ 293

Tire pressure monitoring system Checking the tire pressure .................. 293 Checking the tire temperature ............ 293

Tire pressure table .................................. 290 Tire Quality Grading ................................ 299 Tire temperature

Checking (tire pressure monitoring system) ............................................... 293 Tire pressure monitoring system (function) ............................................. 291

Tire tread .................................................. 287 Tire-change tool kit

Overview .............................................. 310 TIREFIT kit ................................................ 268

Storage location .................................. 268 Using ................................................... 268

Tires Changing hub caps .............................. 311 Characteristics .................................... 302 Checking ............................................. 287 Checking the tire pressure (man ually) .................................................... 291 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres sure monitoring system) ...................... 293 Definitions ........................................... 304 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................................. 300 Flat tire ................................................ 266 Installing .............................................. 315 Load index ........................................... 302 Load-bearing capacity ......................... 302 Maximum tire load ............................... 301 Maximum tire pressure ........................ 301 MOExtended tires ................................ 267 Noise ................................................... 287 Notes on installing ............................... 307 Overview of tire labeling ...................... 299 Removing ............................................. 314 Replacing ..................................... 307, 311 Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system ................................... 294

418 Index

Restarting the tire pressure monitor ing system ........................................... 293 Rotating ............................................... 310 Selection ............................................. 307 Snow chains ........................................ 288 Speed rating ........................................ 302 Storing ................................................. 310 Temperature grade .............................. 299 Tire and Loading Information placard ............................................................. 295 Tire pressure (notes) ........................... 288 Tire pressure loss warning system (function) ............................................. 294 Tire pressure monitoring system (function) ............................................. 291 Tire pressure table .............................. 290 Tire Quality Grading ............................. 299 Tire size designation ............................ 302 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 268 Traction grade ..................................... 299 Tread wear grade ................................. 299 Unusual handling characteristics ......... 287

Tool see Vehicle tool kit

Top Tether .................................................. 58

Touch Control On-board computer ............................. 203 Operating ............................................. 210

Touchpad .................................................. 210 Operating ............................................. 210

Touchscreen (media display) Operating ............................................. 210

Tow-away alarm Activating/deactivating ......................... 85 Function ................................................ 85

Tow-bar system ....................................... 200 Tow-starting ............................................. 283 Towing away ............................................ 279 Towing eye

Installing .............................................. 282 Storage location .................................. 282

Towing methods ...................................... 278 Traction grade ......................................... 299 Traffic information

Switching on the display ...................... 225 Traffic Sign Assist .................................... 178

Function/notes .................................... 178

Setting ................................................. 179 System limitations ............................... 178

Transmission (problem) .......................... 139 Transmission position display ................ 137 Transporting

Vehicle ................................................. 281 Tread wear grade ..................................... 299 Trim element (Care) ................................ 263 Trunk lid

Closing ................................................... 74 Emergency release (from inside) ............ 76 HANDS-FREE ACCESS ........................... 75 Opening ................................................. 73 Opening dimensions ............................ 330

TuneIn ....................................................... 247 Calling up ............................................. 247

Turn signal indicator ................................ 110 Turn signal light

Activating/deactivating ....................... 110 Two-way radios

Frequencies ......................................... 321 Notes on installation ........................... 320

Index 419

Transmission output (maximum) .......... 321

U Unlocking setting ...................................... 67 Updates

Important system updates ................... 218 USB port

Rear passenger compartment ............. 105

V Vehicle ...................................................... 127

Activating/deactivating standby mode ................................................... 151 Collision detection (parking) ................ 150 Correct use ........................................... 28 Data acquisition .................................... 30 Data storage .......................................... 30 Diagnostics connection ......................... 27 Equipment ............................................. 23 Limited Warranty ................................... 30 Locking (automatically) .......................... 71 Locking (from inside) ............................. 70 Locking (KEYLESS-GO) .......................... 70 Locking/unlocking (emergency key) ...... 72

Lowering .............................................. 316 Maintenance .......................................... 24 Medical aids .......................................... 28 Parking for an extended period ............ 150 Problem notification .............................. 29 QR code rescue card ............................. 30 Qualified specialist workshop ................ 28 Raising ................................................. 312 Standby mode function ........................ 151 Starting (emergency operation mode) .................................................. 127 Starting (Remote Online) ..................... 128 Starting (start/stop button) ................. 126 Switching off (start/stop button) ........ 144 Towing ................................................. 200 Unlocking (from inside) ......................... 70 Unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) ....................... 70 Ventilating (convenience opening) ......... 78

Vehicle data Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT) ............ 136 Roof load ............................................. 331 Turning radius ...................................... 330 Vehicle height ...................................... 330 Vehicle length ...................................... 330 Vehicle width ....................................... 330

Wheelbase ........................................... 330 Vehicle data storage

Event data recorders ............................. 34 MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect ........................................... 34

Vehicle dimensions ................................. 330 Vehicle electronics

Notes .................................................. 320 Two-way radios .................................... 320

Vehicle identification number see VIN

Vehicle identification plate .................... 322 Paint code ........................................... 322 VIN ...................................................... 322

Vehicle interior Cooling or heating (Remote Online) ..... 128

Vehicle key see SmartKey

Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS

Vehicle operation Outside the USA or Canada ................... 24

420 Index

Vehicle tool kit ........................................ 268 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 268 Towing eye .......................................... 282

Ventilating Convenience opening ............................ 78

Vents see Air vents

VIN ............................................................ 322 Engine compartment ........................... 322 Identification plate .............................. 322 Windshield ........................................... 322

Vision Removing condensation from the windows .............................................. 123

Voice Control System Function ............................................... 212 Starting ................................................ 212

W Warning lamps

see Warning/indicator lamps Warning system

see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

Warning triangle Removing ............................................ 265 Setting up ............................................ 266

Warning/indicator lamp ! ABS warning lamp ...................... 390 Active Brake Assist warning lamp .................................................... 389 J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only) ...................................... 388 $ Brake warning lamp (USA only) .. 388 J Brakes warning lamp (yellow) (Canada only) ...................................... 387 Coolant warning lamp (red) ........ 382 Coolant warning lamp (yellow) ... 384 ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (Canada only) ..................... 386 F Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (USA only) .......................... 386 # Electrical malfunction warning lamp .................................................... 384 ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp .. 384

ESP OFF warning lamp ............. 391

ESP warning lamp flashes ........ 390

ESP warning lamp lights up ...... 391 Fuel reserve warning lamp flashes ................................................. 385 Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up .............................................. 385 Power steering warning lamp (red) ..................................................... 381 Recuperative Brake System warning lamp (USA only) ..................... 387 6 Restraint system warning lamp .. 380 Seat belt warning lamp flashes ... 381 Seat belt warning lamp lights up ........................................................ 381 ! The electric parking brake (yel low) indicator lamp .............................. 386 h Tire pressure monitoring sys tem warning lamp flashes ................... 392

Index 421

h Tire pressure monitoring sys tem warning lamp lights up ................. 393 L Warning lamp for distance warning function ................................. 389

Warning/indicator lamps ....................... 379 Overview ............................................. 379 PASSENGER AIR BAG ............................. 47

Warranty .................................................... 30 Washer fluid

see Windshield washer fluid Washing by hand (care) .......................... 260 Water tank

see Air-water duct Weather information ............................... 225 Web browser

Overview (multimedia system) ............ 236 Wheel change

Lowering the vehicle ............................ 316 Mounting a new wheel ......................... 315 Removing a wheel ................................ 314 Removing/installing hub caps .............. 311

Wheel rotation ......................................... 310

Wheels Care ..................................................... 261 Changing hub caps .............................. 311 Checking ............................................. 287 Checking the tire pressure (man ually) .................................................... 291 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres sure monitoring system) ...................... 293 Definitions ........................................... 304 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................................. 300 Flat tire ................................................ 266 Installing .............................................. 315 Load index ........................................... 302 Load-bearing capacity ......................... 302 Maximum tire load ............................... 301 Maximum tire pressure ........................ 301 MOExtended tires ................................ 267 Noise ................................................... 287 Notes on installing ............................... 307 Overview of tire labeling ...................... 299 Removing ............................................. 314 Replacing ..................................... 307, 311 Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system ................................... 294

Restarting the tire pressure monitor ing system ........................................... 293 Rotating ............................................... 310 Selection ............................................. 307 Snow chains ........................................ 288 Speed rating ........................................ 302 Storing ................................................. 310 Temperature grade .............................. 299 Tire and Loading Information placard ............................................................. 295 Tire characteristics .............................. 302 Tire pressure (notes) ........................... 288 Tire pressure loss warning system (function) ............................................. 294 Tire pressure monitoring system (function) ............................................. 291 Tire pressure table .............................. 290 Tire Quality Grading ............................. 299 Tire size designation ............................ 302 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 268 Traction grade ..................................... 299 Tread wear grade ................................. 299 Unusual handling characteristics ......... 287

Wi-Fi Setting ................................................. 219

422 Index

Widescreen Cockpit Instrument Dis play

Instrument cluster ................................. 12 Window curtain airbag ............................. 42 Windows

see Side windows Windows (care) ........................................ 261 Windshield ................................................ 115

Replacing the wiper blades .................. 115 Windshield

see Windshield Windshield washer fluid ......................... 328

Notes .................................................. 328 Windshield washer system

Topping up ........................................... 256 Windshield wipers

Activating/deactivating ....................... 115 Replacing the wiper blades .................. 115

Winter operation Snow chains ........................................ 288

Wiper blades Care ..................................................... 261

Replacing ..........................

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the A-Class Mercedes-Benz works, you can view and download the Mercedes-Benz A-Class 2021 Operator's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Operator's Manual for Mercedes-Benz A-Class as well as other Mercedes-Benz manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Operator's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mercedes-Benz A-Class. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mercedes-Benz A-Class 2021 Operator's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mercedes-Benz A-Class 2021 Operator's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mercedes-Benz A-Class 2021 Operator's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mercedes-Benz A-Class 2021 Operator's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mercedes-Benz A-Class 2021 Operator's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.